OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

1 Equipment Architecture ...............................................................................
1-1
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................................................... 1-1
1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 ...................................................... 1-3
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A .................................................... 1-5
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B .................................................... 1-5
2 Cabinet ........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Types...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration ............................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators .......................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit .................................................................. 2-4
2.2.3 Other Configuration........................................................................ 2-4
2.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................ 2-5
3 Subrack .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3-3
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3-4
3.1.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3-9
3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 ........................................................... 3-9
3.2.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3-9
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG .................................................. 3-18
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A ......................................................... 3-19
3.4.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3-19
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B ......................................................... 3-24
3.5.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3-24
4 Board Classification and List ...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Board Classification ................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 SDH Boards ................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 PDH Boards ................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards ................................................................ 4-4
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards ................................................... 4-6
4.1.5 Other Boards .................................................................................. 4-9
4.2 Board Appearance ................................................................................. 4-10
5 SDH Boards ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SL64 ....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5-5
5.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5-5
5.2 SF16/SL16 ............................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5-8
5.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5-10
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 ..................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5-16
5.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5-17
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 ..................................................................................... 5-21
5.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5-22
5.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5-22
5.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5-24
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 ........................................................... 5-27
5.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5-28
5.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5-29
5.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5-29
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 ........................................................................ 5-32
5.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5-33
5.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5-34
5.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5-35
5.6.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 5-36
6 PDH Boards ................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 ................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-4
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S ................................................................... 6-11
6.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-13
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B ................................................................. 6-22
6.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6-23
6.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-24
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S .............................................................................. 6-31
6.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6-32
6.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-32
7 Data Processing Boards .............................................................................. 7-1
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ............................................................... 7-2
7.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-5
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 .................................................... 7-11
7.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7-14
7.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-15
7.3 EMR0/EGR2 ........................................................................................... 7-24
7.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-24
7.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7-27
7.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-28
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 ............................................................................................ 7-34
7.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7-35
7.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-36
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 .............................................................................................. 7-40
7.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-40
7.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7-41
7.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-41
7.6 MST4 ...................................................................................................... 7-45
7.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-45
7.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-48
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards .............................................. 8-1
8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE ....................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 ................................................................................ 8-9
8.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-11
8.3 SCC/GSCC ............................................................................................ 8-16
8.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-18
8.4 CRG ....................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8-23
8.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-24
8.4.4 Version Description........................................................................ 8-26
9 Other Boards ................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 LWX ........................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-3
9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C ............................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-9
9.3 BA2/BPA ................................................................................................ 9-12
9.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-12
9.3.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9-12
9.3.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9-13
9.3.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-14
9.4 COA ........................................................................................................ 9-16
9.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-17
9.4.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9-17
9.4.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-19
9.4.5 Installation ...................................................................................... 9-22
9.4.6 Version Description. ....................................................................... 9-23
9.5 DCU ........................................................................................................ 9-25
9.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-25
9.5.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9-25
9.5.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9-26
9.5.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-26
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI ............................................................................... 9-30
9.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-30
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX ............................................................................ 9-33
9.6.3 Principle of EOW ............................................................................ 9-33
9.6.4 Principle of SAP ............................................................................. 9-34
9.6.5 Principle of SEI .............................................................................. 9-35
9.6.6 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-36
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation ..................................................................... 9-44
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper ................................................................. 9-46
9.6.10 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 9-47
9.7 PIU ......................................................................................................... 9-48
9.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-48
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU ....................................................... 9-48
9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU .......................................................................... 9-49
9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU .......................................................................... 9-49
9.7.5 Front Pane ..................................................................................... 9-50
9.8 UPM ....................................................................................................... 9-55
9.8.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-56
9.8.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9-56
9.8.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-57
9.8.4 Precautions .................................................................................... 9-58
9.9 FAN ........................................................................................................ 9-59
9.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-60
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN ........................................................................ 9-60
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN ........................................................................ 9-61
9.9.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-61
10 Cables .......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Fiber Jumper ........................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.1 Classification ................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.2 Connector .................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable...................................................... 10-5
10.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable ................................... 10-5
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable .................................................... 10-7
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable .................................................................. 10-8
10.2.4 Equipment -48 V/-60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable ... 10-9
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable ............................................................... 10-11
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable ....................................................................... 10-12
10.3 Alarm Cable.......................................................................................... 10-14
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable ............................................................... 10-14
10.3.2 Indicator/ Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN
Subracks ................................................................................................. 10-15
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and
Other Subrack ......................................................................................... 10-17
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/ Output Cable ................................... 10-18
10.4 Management Cable .............................................................................. 10-21
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable ................................................................. 10-21
10.4.2 Serial 1-4/F&f Cable..................................................................... 10-22
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable...................................................... 10-24
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire ........................................................... 10-25
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable ........................................................... 10-26
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable ................................................................ 10-27
10.4.7 Crossover Cable .......................................................................... 10-29
10.5 Signal Cable ......................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.1 75ohm 8xE1 Cable ...................................................................... 10-31
10.5.2 75ohm 16xE1 Cable .................................................................... 10-33
10.5.3 120ohm 8xE1 Cable .................................................................... 10-35
10.5.4 120ohm 16xE1 Cable .................................................................. 10-37
10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable .................................................................. 10-39
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable ............................. 10-41
10.6 Clock Cable .......................................................................................... 10-43
10.6.1 Clock Cable .................................................................................. 10-43
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable ............................................... 10-45
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board ....................................... A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description ................................................................. A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description .................................................................... A-2
B Board Version Description .......................................................................... B-1
B.1 Board Version List .................................................................................. B-1
B.2 Version Description ................................................................................ B-4
B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board .......................................................... B-4
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board............................................................ B-5
B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards ................................................... B-7
B.2.4 Other Boards ................................................................................. B-8
C Power Consumption and Weight ................................................................ C-1
D Abbreviations and Acronyms ..................................................................... D-1
Index .................................................................................................................
HUAWEI
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Manual
V100R003
Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission
System
Manual Version T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31
Product Version V100R003
BOM 31250390
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their
respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Summary of Updates
This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the updates of
contents.
Update History
Manual Version Notes
T2-042587-20040215-C-1.10 Initial field trial release
T2-042586-20040501-C-1.11 The manual style is modified.
T2-042552-20041026-C-1.20 Descriptions of the EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1,

MST4, LMST4, UXCS, XCE, LWX, and MR2A are added.
T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21 Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64, and COA are added.
T2-042590-20050820-C-1.30 1. The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN

3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are
combined into one.
2. The descriptions of the CRG, PIU, PL3A, R1SL4,
R1SLD4, R1SL1, R1SLQ1and MST4 boards are added.
3. The manual is reorganized. The boards are described
in several chapters.
T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31 Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete
the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board. Update the
weight of the ETSI cabinet and the power consumption of the
boards.
Updates of Contents
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document
version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Manual Version 1.31
Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the
N1SL64 and N1SF64 board.

The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and

OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. The manual is reorganized. Chapter 4 of the
original manual is divided into 6 chapters (chapter 4 to chapter 9).
Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture

Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A
and OptiX OSN 1500B respectively.
Chapter 2 Cabinet
Introduces the cabinet used by OptiX OSN series products.
Chapter 3 Subrack
Introduces the subrack structure and board configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B.
Chapter 4 Board Classification and List
This is a new chapter, which introduces board classification and gives a list of boards.
The subsequent chapters (chapter 5–chapter 9) give detailed descriptions.
Chapter 5 SDH Boards
The descriptions of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 are added.
Chapter 6 PDH Boards
The descriptions of the PL3A is added.
Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards
The descriptions of the N3EFS0, N3EGS2 and N3EFS4 are added.
Chapter 8 Cross-connect and SCC Boards
The descriptions of the CRG is added.
Chapter 9 Other Boards
The descriptions of the PIU and FANA are added.
Appendix B Board Version Description
It is newly added, introducing version characteristics of all boards of the OptiX OSN
series products and their differences.
Chapter 3 Subrack
The boards ETS8, SF64 and COA are added in the table 3-2.
Chapter 4 Boards
The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: ETS8, SF64 and COA.
The detailed descriptions of following boards are modified and improved:
EGS2/EFS0/EFS4.
Chapter 5 Cables
Classification and descriptions of cables are improved.
Chapter 3 Subrack
The boards EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS are
added in the table 3-2.

Chapter 4 Boards
The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1,
MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual Contents
Contents
1 Equipment Architecture 1-1

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 1-1
1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 1-3
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A 1-5
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B 1-5
2 Cabinet 2-1
2.1 Types 2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration 2-3
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators 2-3
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit 2-4
2.2.3 Other Configuration 2-4
2.3 Technical Parameters 2-5
3 Subrack 3-1
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 3-1
3.1.1 Structure 3-1
3.1.2 Slot Distribution 3-3
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 3-4
3.1.4 Technical Parameters 3-9
3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-9
3.2.1 Structure 3-9
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG 3-18
i
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-19

3.4.1 Structure 3-19
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-24
3.5.1 Structure 3-24
4 Board Classification and List 4-1

4.1 Board Classification 4-1
4.1.1 SDH Boards 4-1
4.1.2 PDH Boards 4-3
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards 4-4
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards 4-6
4.1.5 Other Boards 4-9
4.2 Board Appearance 4-10
5 SDH Boards 5-1

5.1 SL64 5-1
5.1.1 Functionality 5-1
5.1.2 Principle 5-2
5.1.3 Front Panel 5-4
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration 5-5
5.1.5 Version Description 5-5
5.2 SF16/SL16 5-7
5.2.2 Principle 5-8
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 5-15
5.3.2 Principle 5-16
ii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 5-21
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 5-27
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 5-32
5.6.4 Protection Configuration 5-36
6 PDH Boards 6-1

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 6-1
6.1.3 Principle 6-2
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S 6-11
iii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B 6-22
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S 6-31
7 Data Processing Boards 7-1

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-2
7.1.2 Principle 7-4
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 7-11
iv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.3 EMR0/EGR2 7-24
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 7-34
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 7-40
7.6 MST4 7-45
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards 8-1

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE 8-2
v
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
8.1.2 Principle 8-3

8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 8-9
8.3 SCC/GSCC 8-16
8.4 CRG 8-22
9 Other Boards 9-1

9.1 LWX 9-1
9.1.2 Principle 9-2
9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-7
9.2.2 Principle 9-8
vi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9.3 BA2/BPA 9-12
9.3.2 Application 9-12
9.4 COA 9-16
9.4.5 Installation 9-22
9.4.6 Version Description. 9-23
9.5 DCU 9-25
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI 9-30
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX 9-33
9.6.3 Principle of EOW 9-33
9.6.4 Principle of SAP 9-34
9.6.5 Principle of SEI 9-35
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation 9-44
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper 9-46
9.7 PIU 9-48
vii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU 9-48

9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU 9-49
9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU 9-49
9.7.5 Front Pane 9-50
9.8 UPM 9-55
9.8.4 Precautions 9-58
9.9 FAN 9-59
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN 9-60
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN 9-61
10 Cables 10-1
10.1 Fiber Jumper 10-1
10.1.1 Classification 10-1
10.1.2 Connector 10-2
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable 10-5
10.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable 10-5
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable 10-7
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable 10-8
10.2.4 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable 10-9
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable 10-11
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable 10-12
10.3 Alarm Cable 10-14
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable 10-14
10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks 10-15
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack 10-17
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable 10-18
10.4 Management Cable 10-21
viii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable 10-21

10.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable 10-22
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable 10-24
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire 10-25
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable 10-26
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable 10-27
10.4.7 Crossover Cable 10-29
10.5 Signal Cable 10-31
10.5.1 75 Ω 8xE1 Cable 10-31
10.5.2 75 Ω 16xE1 Cable 10-33
10.5.3 120 Ω 8xE1 Cable 10-35
10.5.4 120 Ω 16xE1 Cable 10-37
10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable 10-39
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable 10-41
10.6 Clock Cable 10-43
10.6.1 Clock Cable 10-43
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable 10-45
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board A-1

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description A-2
B Board Version Description B-1

B.1 Board Version List B-1
B.2 Version Description B-4
B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board B-4
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board B-5
B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards B-7
B.2.4 Other Boards B-8
C Power Consumption and Weight C-1
D Abbreviations and Acronyms D-1
ix
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500 1-1

Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 1-2
Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500 1-3
Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 1-4
Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A 1-5
Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B 1-5
Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet 2-2
Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration 2-3
Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit 2-4
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 3-2
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500 3-3
Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack 3-10
Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation) 3-11
Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation) 3-11
Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation) 3-12
Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation) 3-12
Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-19
Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation) 3-19
Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation) 3-20
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-20
Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-24
Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation) 3-25
Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation) 3-25
Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation) 3-26
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation) 3-26
x
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 4-1 Board appearance 4-11

Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64 5-3
Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64 5-4
Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16 5-9
Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16 5-10
Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 5-16
Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 5-18
Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 5-23
Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 5-24
Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4 5-29
Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 5-29
Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1 5-34
Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 5-35
Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 5-37
Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 5-38
Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 5-39
Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 5-39
Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4 6-3
Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04 6-4
Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-6
Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-7
Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-8
Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-8
Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A 6-12
Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals 6-13
Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S 6-14
Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-16
Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-18
Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500 6-19
Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-20
Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM 6-23
Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals 6-24
Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-25
Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-27
Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-28
Figure 6-19 Slot assignment upon 1:4 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-29
xi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S 6-32
Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-34
Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 6-35
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2 7-5
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-6
Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2 7-14
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 7-15
Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500 7-18
Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500 7-19
Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500 7-19
Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0 7-27
Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2 7-29
Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-35
Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-37
Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1 7-42
Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4 7-47
Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4 7-48
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS 8-3
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 8-4
Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks 8-6
Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16 8-11
Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-11
Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC 8-17
Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame 8-18
Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC 8-19
Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG 8-23
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG 8-24
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX 9-2
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX 9-4
Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station 9-8
Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals 9-8
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-9
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A 9-10
Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network 9-13
Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA 9-13
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA 9-14
xii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA) 9-16

Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA 9-17
Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA) 9-18
Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA 9-18
Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA 9-19
Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA 9-19
Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector 9-20
Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC 9-21
Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet 9-23
Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system 9-25
Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU 9-26
Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU 9-27
Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX 9-33
Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW 9-34
Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame 9-34
Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP 9-35
Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI 9-36
Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500) 9-45
Figure 9-28 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 2500) 9-45
Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500) 9-46
Figure 9-30 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 2500) 9-46
Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU 9-48
Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU 9-49
Figure 9-33 Functional block diagram of the R2PIU 9-50
Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU 9-51
Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU 9-51
Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIU 9-52
Figure 9-37 Front panel of the R2PIU 9-53
Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box 9-55
Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box 9-57
Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500) 9-59
Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN 9-60
Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN 9-61
Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN 9-62
Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface 10-3
Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface 10-4
xiii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface 10-4

Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface 10-5
Figure 10-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable 10-6
Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable 10-6
Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable 10-7
Figure 10-8 Structure of the subrack power cable 10-8
Figure 10-9 Structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable 10-9
Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable 10-10
Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable 10-11
Figure 10-12 Structure of the subrack power cable 10-12
Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable 10-14
Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks 10-16
Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack 10-17
Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable 10-19
Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable 10-21
Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable 10-23
Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable 10-24
Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire 10-25
Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable 10-27
Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable 10-28
Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable 10-29
Figure 10-24 Structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable 10-31
Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable 10-36
Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable 10-40
Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable 10-41
Figure 10-30 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable 10-44
Figure 10-31 Structure of the 120 Ω clock cable 10-44
Figure 10-32 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable 10-45
Figure 10-33 Structure of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable 10-46
xiv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products 2-1
Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators 2-3
Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards 2-4
Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet 2-5
Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500 3-3
Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect
capacity) 3-4
Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect
capacity) 3-6
Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 3-7
Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 3-8
Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 3-9
Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-13
Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-13
Table 3-9 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-16
Table 3-10 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-16
Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack 3-17
Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG 3-18
Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-21
Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-22
Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-23
Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-27
Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-27
Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-29
Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-30
Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-31
xv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 4-1 SDH boards 4-2

Table 4-2 PDH boards 4-3
Table 4-3 Data processing boards 4-5
Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards 4-7
Table 4-5 Other boards 4-9
Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64 5-1
Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64 5-5
Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64 5-5
Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692 5-6
Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16 5-7
Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16 5-11
Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16 5-12
Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16 5-13
Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692 5-14
Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4 5-15
Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 5-19
Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4 5-19
Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 5-21
Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 5-25
Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 5-26
Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 5-27
Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards 5-30
Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 5-31
Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 5-32
Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1 5-32
Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08 5-36
Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1 5-36
Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 5-38
Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 5-39
Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 5-40
Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1 5-40
Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 5-41
Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 6-1
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04 6-5
Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4 6-5
Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-7
xvi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-8
Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-9
Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4 6-9
Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04 6-10
Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 6-11
Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S 6-15
Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 6-15
Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-17
Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-18
Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-19
Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-19
Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN
1500B 6-20
Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S 6-21
Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-22
Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM 6-22
Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-25
Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM 6-26
Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-29
Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-29
Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S 6-31
Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S 6-33
Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1 6-33
Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-34
Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-35
Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S 6-36
Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-2
Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2 7-7
Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8 7-7
Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-7
Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 7-8
Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-9
xvii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 7-11

Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2 7-16
Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 7-16
Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0 7-17
Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 7-18
Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 7-20
Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards 7-21
Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 7-22
Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 7-24
Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2 7-30
Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2 7-30
Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2 7-31
Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2 7-32
Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2 7-33
Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-34
Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1 7-38
Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-39
Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1 7-40
Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1 7-43
Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1 7-43
Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1 7-44
Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4 7-45
Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4 7-46
Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4 7-49
Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE. 8-2
Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 8-5
Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS 8-6
Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards 8-7
Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 8-7
Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-9
Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-12
Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL 8-13
Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type 8-14
Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-14
Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC 8-19
Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC 8-20
xviii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC 8-21

Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG 8-24
Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG 8-25
Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG 8-26
Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX 9-1
Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX 9-4
Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX 9-5
Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX 9-6
Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX 9-6
Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C 9-7
Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-10
Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-11
Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA 9-12
Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA 9-15
Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA 9-20
Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin 9-21
Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA 9-23
Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU 9-28
Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI 9-30
Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX 9-36
Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX 9-37
Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface 9-38
Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface 9-38
Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface 9-38
Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface 9-39
Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface 9-39
Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface 9-39
Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface 9-40
Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface 9-40
Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface 9-40
Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel 9-42
Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW 9-42
Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW 9-43
xix
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP 9-43

Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI 9-43
Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting 9-46
Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI 9-47
Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel 9-51
Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU 9-52
Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU 9-52
Table 9-40 Interfaces of the Q1PIU 9-52
Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel 9-53
Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU 9-54
Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box 9-57
Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel 9-57
Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM 9-58
Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN 9-61
Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN 9-62
Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN 9-62
Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper 10-2
Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector 10-3
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables 10-5
Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable 10-8
Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable 10-10
Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable 10-12
Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable 10-13
Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable 10-14
Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable 10-15
Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks 10-16
Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack 10-18
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500 10-19
Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500 10-20
Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables 10-21
Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable 10-22
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable 10-23
Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable 10-25
Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire 10-26
Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable 10-27
Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable 10-28
xx
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable 10-29

Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables 10-31
Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable 10-32
Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable 10-36
Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable 10-42
Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables 10-43
Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable 10-44
Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable 10-46
Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards B-5
Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version B-5
Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards B-6
Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards B-7
Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC B-7
Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards B-8
Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN B-8
xxi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual About This Manual
About This Manual
Release Notes
This manual covers:
The OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
Related Manuals
The following table shows the manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OSN 2500, and OSN
1500.
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Documentation Guide
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System Optical Transmission System Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual System Technical Manual System Technical Manual System
Description Description Description
Installation Manual Installation Manual Installation Manual
Electronic Documentation Electronic Documentation Electronic Documentation
Technical Manual Networking Technical Manual Networking Technical Manual Networking
and Application and Application and Application
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Routine
Maintenance
xxii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Alarm and
Performance Event
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Commissioning Guide
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide

Note: The manual name with OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 indicates that the manual is shared by the
OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
Main points of the manuals for the OptiX OSN series products are as follows.
Documentation Guide
Introduces the contents and usage of the manuals.
Technical Manual System Description
Introduces the functionality, structure, performance, specifications, and theory of
the product.
Technical Manual Networking and Application
Introduces the networking, protection, and application of the product.
Introduces the hardware of the product, including the cabinet, subrack, power, fan,
board, and a variety of interfaces.
Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance
Introduces the main items and precautions involved in routing maintenance.
Maintenance Troubleshooting
Guides the analysis and troubleshooting of common faults.
Maintenance Alarm and Performance Event
Guides the way of processing alarms and performance events.
Installation Manual
Guides the on-site installation of the product, covering the installation of cabinet,
subrack and components, and grounding specifications.
Commissioning Guide
Introduces the equipment commissioning process, including indices of hardware,
software, and service operation.
Configuration Guide
Introduces the way and procedures of configuring SDH services, Ethernet private
line services, Ethernet LAN services, RPR services, and ATM services on the
T2000.
Electronic Documentation (CD-ROM)
Covers all the preceding manuals. Acrobat Reader is attached.
Organization
The manual is organized as follows.
xxiii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Chapter Description
Chapter 1 Equipment Introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX
Architecture OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.
Chapter 2 Cabinet Describes the dimensions, appearance, and technical

specifications of the cabinets used by the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500, and the
configuration in the cabinets.
Chapter 3 Subrack Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 subracks. Lists the board types
that can seat in the slots of the subracks.
Chapter 4 Board Classifies the boards into SDH boards, PDH boards, data
Classification and List processing boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and
other boards, and gives a detailed list of all available boards.
Chapter 5 SDH Boards Introduces SDH boards in terms of functionality, principle,

front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version
description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 6 PDH Boards Introduces PDH boards in terms of functionality, principle,

front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version
Chapter 7 Data Introduces data processing boards in terms of functionality,

Processing Boards principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board
protection, version description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 8 Introduces cross-connect and SCC boards in terms of

Cross-Connect and functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces,
System Control Boards board protection, version description, and technical
parameters.
Chapter 9 Other Boards Introduces other boards (for example, the system auxiliary
interface board) in terms of functionality, principle, front
panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version
Chapter 10 Cables Introduces the external and the internal cables of the OptiX
OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, and
gives detailed description in terms of the structure,
appearance, pin assignment, and technical parameters.
Appendix A–Appendix D Includes four appendices:

Appendix A Quick Reference for Indicators
Appendix B Power Consumption and Weight of Boards
Appendix C Board Version Configuration
Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms
The appendices give a quick searching to equipment-related
information during routine maintenance.
Readers can locate the chapter where required information
is covered through appendices quickly.
xxiv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for:
Network administrator
Maintenance engineer
Provisioning engineer
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions.
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Description
A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result
Warning in harm to person.
A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam could
Warning result in personal injury.
A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury.

Warning
A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment

Caution damage or loss of data.
A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is

Caution static-sensitive.
Important An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an
Note undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary
information.
Note A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful,

non-critical information.
GUI Conventions
Convention Description
<> Button name are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK>
button
[] Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside
square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
/ Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,

[File/Create/Folder].
xxv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 1 Equipment Architecture
1 Equipment Architecture
This chapter introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet.
1-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 1-2 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep
ETSI cabinet.
The OptiX OSN 3500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit,
subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.
1
1. Cabinet 2. Power distribution unit 3. Upper subrack

4. Fixing frame for order wire 5. Lower subrack 6. Side panel
Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
1-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500

Figure 1-3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 2500.
Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, or in
a standard 19-inch cabinet. Figure 1-4 shows the components when the equipment
seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet.
The OptiX OSN 2500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit,
subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.
1-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Cabinet 2. Power distribution unit 3. Upper subrack 4. Fixing frame for order wire
5. Middle subrack 6. Lower subrack 7. Side panel
Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500
1-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The OptiX OSN 1500A is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or
600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall.
Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B

The OptiX OSN 1500B is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or
600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall.
Figure 1-6 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B
1-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 2 Cabinet
2 Cabinet
This chapter introduces the dimensions, technical specifications, and the

configuration of the cabinet equipped by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
OptiX OSN 1500A, or OptiX OSN 1500B.
2.1 Types
Table 2-1 shows the cabinets that can house the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products
Cabinet ETSI ETSI 19-inch Access Hanging
300-mm deep 600-mm deep cabinet network
Product cabinet
OptiX OSN 3500 9 9
OptiX OSN 2500 9 9 9
OptiX OSN 1500A 9 9 9 9 9
OptiX OSN 1500B 9 9 9 9
Notes: These cabinets should be provided by Huawei.

Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the ETSI cabinet.
2-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet
2-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2.2 Cabinet Configuration

There are indicators and a power distribution unit on the top of ETSI cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2-2.
1
Power Critical MajorMinor
Power distribution unit
1. Cabinet indicators 2. Power distribution unit

Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

Table 2-2 shows the description of cabinet indicators.
Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators
Indicator Status Description
Power indicator - Power On The equipment is powered on.
(green)
Off The equipment is not powered on.
Critical alarm indicator - Critical On There are critical alarms.

(red)
Off There are no critical alarms.
Major alarm indicator - Major On There are major alarms.

(orange)
Off There are no major alarms.
Minor alarm indicator - Minor On There are minor alarms.

(yellow)
Off There are no minor alarms.
Note: The cabinet indicators are driven by subrack, so you should connect the cable properly and power on
the subrack first.
2-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit

Figure 2-3 shows the power distribution unit.
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
INPUT
SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A
1. Grounding stud 2. PGND

3. RTN1(+) 4. RTN2(+)
5. NEG1(–) 6. NEG2(–)
7. Left output cable terminal 8. Right output cable terminal
Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit
To the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500A, the left output
cable terminal feeds power to the PIU board on the left side of the subrack, and the
right output cable terminal to that on the right side of the subrack. Table 2-3 reflects the
mapping relation between the terminals and PIU boards.
Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards
Left Right
Connected to Connected to
terminal terminal
The PIU board on the left of The PIU board on the right of
1 1
the first subrack the first subrack
2 2
the second subrack the second subrack
3 3
the third subrack the third subrack
4 4
the fourth subrack the fourth subrack
Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500, only terminal 1 and terminal 2 are in use normally. Terminals 3
and 4 can feed power to other equipment, such as COA.
To the OptiX OSN 1500B, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the upper PIU
board of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to the lower PIU board of the
subrack.
2.2.3 Other Configuration
The cabinet can also house other external case-shape devices.
Uninterruptible power modules (UPM)
The UPM numbered GIE4805S can feed power to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX
OSN 1500 directly. The UPM converts the 220 V AC into –48 V DC, thus providing
2-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
power for equipment without –48 V DC feeding and for storage battery when required.
Case-shape optical amplifier (COA)
The OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured with two COA at
most. The OptiX OSN 1500 can be configured with one COA.
Tone & Data access unit (TDA)
Fiber spooling frame: spooling redundancy fibers inside the cabinet
HUB
2.3 Technical Parameters

Table 2-4 shows the technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight OSN 3500 OSN 2500 OSN 1500
(kg) subracks subracks subracks
housed housed housed
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55 1 2 Up to the
cabinet
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79 1 2 capacity and
the number of
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60 2 3 available
power
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84 2 3
supplies
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70 2 4
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94 2 4
2-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack
3 Subrack
This chapter introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the
subrack of:
The OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 2500
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG
The OptiX OSN 1500A
The OptiX OSN 1500B
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500
This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the
OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
3.1.1 Structure
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into board
area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.
3-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Board area 2. Fan area 3. Fiber routing area

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Board area: housing all boards of the OptiX OSN 3500

Fan area: housing three fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function
Fiber routing area: for fiber routing
3-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3.1.2 Slot Distribution

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two layers. The upper layer gives 19 slots for
interface boards. The lower layer gives 18 slots for processing boards. Figure 3-2
shows the slot distribution.
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P P A
I I U
U U X
FAN FAN FAN
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X X S S
C C C C
S S C C
Fiber Routing
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500
1. Slots for Interface Boards

Service interface boards: slots 19–26, slots 29–36
2. Slots for Processing Boards

Service processing boards: slots 1–8 and slots 11–17
3. Slots for Other Boards

XCS boards: slots 9–10
SCC boards: slots 17–18 (Slot 17 can also hold a service processing board)
Power interface boards: slot 27 and slot 28
Auxiliary interface boards: slot 37
4. Slot Mapping Table

Table 3-1 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards
to the slots for its corresponding interface boards.
Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500
Slot for Slots for Slot for Slots for corresponding
processing corresponding processing interface boards
boards interface boards boards
Slot 2 Slots 19, 20 Slot 3 Slots 21, 22
3-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots

1. Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 offers an 80 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity
depending on the type of cross-connect boards. Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 associate
processing boards to the corresponding slots under the two cross-connect
configurations.
Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity)
Slots and
12 (10 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 2–slot 5,
Slot 2–slot 4
Slot 5–slot 6
Slot 7–slot 8
Slot 11–slot
Slot 13–slot
Slot 15–slot
slot 13–slot
(2.5 Gbit/s)
capacity
(10 Gbit/s)
Gbit/s )
16 (1.25
Gbit/s)
Slot 17
14 (2.5
Slot 1
16
Boards
N2SL64 9 9
N1SF16, 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SL16(A)
N1/N2SLQ4 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SLD4, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1
N1SLT1 (Note 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1)
N1SEP (Note 2) 9
N1SEP1 (Note 9 9 9 9 9
2)
N1/N2SPQ4, 9
N1PD3, N1PL3
N1PL3A 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1PQ1, 9 9
N1PQM
N1EFS4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1/N2EFS0 9
3-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slots and
12 (10 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 2–slot 5,
Slot 2–slot 4
Slot 5–slot 6
Slot 7–slot 8
Slot 11–slot
Slot 13–slot
Slot 15–slot
slot 13–slot
(2.5 Gbit/s)
capacity
(10 Gbit/s)
Gbit/s )
16 (1.25
Gbit/s)
Slot 17
14 (2.5
Slot 1
16
Boards
N1/N2EGS2, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1EGT2,
N1/N2EGR2
N1EFT8（work 9
with interface
boards）
N1EFT8 (led 9 9 9 9 9
out from front
panel)
N1/N2EMR0 9
(work with
interface
boards)
N1/N2EMR0 9 9 9 9 9
(led out from
front panel)
N1ADL4, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1ADQ1,
N1IDQ1,
N1IDL4 (Note
3)
N1MR2A 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1MR2C (Note
4)
N1LWX 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1DCU, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1BA2, N1BPA
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces.
Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when
working with interface boards.
Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 19–26 or slots 29–36.
3-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity)
Slots and
Slot 12–slot 13
Slot 14–slot 16
Slot 2–slot 5,
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
slot 13–slot6
Slot 2–slot 5
Slot 6–slot 7
capacity
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(10 Gbit/s)
(10 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 17
Slot 1
Slot 8
Boards
N2SL64 9 9
N1SF16, 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SL16(A)
N1/N2SLQ4, 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SLD4
N1/N2SL4, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note
1)
N1SEP (Note 2) 9
N1SEP1 (Note 9 9 only in only in 9

2) slot 6 slot
13
N1/N2SPQ4, 9
N1PD3, N1PL3
N1PL3A 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1PQ1, 9 9
N1PQM
N1EFS4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1/N2EFS0 9
N1/N2EGS2, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1EGT2,
N1/N2EGR2
N1EFT8 (work only in

with interface slot
boards) 13
N1EFT8 (led 9 9 only in only in 9

out from front slot 6 slot
panel) 13
N1/N2EMR0 9
(work with
interface
boards)
3-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slots and
Slot 12–slot 13
Slot 14–slot 16
Slot 2–slot 5,
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
slot 13–slot6
Slot 2–slot 5
Slot 6–slot 7
capacity
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(10 Gbit/s)
(10 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 17
Slot 1
Slot 8
Boards
N1/N2EMR0 9 9 only in only in 9

(led out from slot 6 slot
front panel) 13
N1ADL4, 9 9 9 9
N1ADQ1 (Note
3)
N1IDQ1, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1IDL4 (Note
3)
N1MR2A 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1MR2C (Note
4)
N1LWX 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1DCU, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1BA2, N1BPA
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces.
Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as
SEP when working with interface boards.
2. Interface Boards
Table 3-4 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
Slots
Slot 19
Slot 20
Slot 21
Slot 22
Slot 23
Slot 24
Slot 25
Slot 26
Slot 29
Slot 30
Slot 31
Slot 32
Slot 33
Slot 34
Slot 35
Slot 36
Boards
N1EU08 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
(Note)
N1OU08 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
(LC interface)
(Note)
N2OU08 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
(SC interface)
(Note)
N1EU04 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
3-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slots
Slot 19
Slot 20
Slot 21
Slot 22
Slot 23
Slot 24
Slot 25
Slot 26
Slot 29
Slot 30
Slot 31
Slot 32
Slot 33
Slot 34
Slot 35
Slot 36
Boards
N1MU04 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1D34S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1D75S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1D12S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1D12B 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1ETF8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1EFF8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1ETS8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1TSB8 9 9
Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EU08, N1OU08, and N2OU08 board when the cross-connect
capacity is 40 Gbit/s.
3. Other Boards
Table 3-5 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface
boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
Slots
Slot 9–slot
101–slot 102
59–slot 60
17–slot 18
27–slot 28
38–slot 40
Slot
Slot 37
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
10
Boards
N1GXCS, 9
N2GXCS
N1EXCS 9
(Note 1)
N1UXCSA( 9
Note 1)
N1UXCSB( 9
Note 1)
N1XCE 9
(Note 2)
N1SCC 9
N1GSCC, 9
N2GSCC
3-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slots
Slot 9–slot
101–slot 102
59–slot 60
17–slot 18
27–slot 28
38–slot 40
Slot
Slot 37
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
10
Boards
N1PIU 9
N1AUX 9
N1FAN 9
(Note 3)
61COA, 9
62COA
(Note 3)
Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EXCS, N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB, and N1XCE
board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s.
Note 2: The N1XCE can only seat in the extended subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Logical slots
for the N1XCE are slot 59 and slot 60.
Note 3: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical
slots.
3.1.4 Technical Parameters

Table 3-6 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Dimensions 722 mm (H) x 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)
Weight 23 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and
fans)
3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.
3.2.1 Structure
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into
processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and
fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.
3-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2 1
1. Auxiliary interface area 2. Interface board area 3. Processing board area

4. Fan area 5. PIU area
Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock

interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on
Processing board area: housing the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500
Interface board area: housing the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500
Fan area: housing two fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 has eight slots for interface boards and ten slots
for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-5 shows the
access capacity for the subrack.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Processing board 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
SAP
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(Slot 22) (Slot 24) (Slot 25) (Slot 23)
Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
S S
S S S S S S S S
L L
L L L L L L L L
O O S S S S
S S S S O O O O O O O O
T T L L L L
L L L L T T T T T T T T
9 10 O O O O
O O O O 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14
T T T T
T T T T
C C 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 S
1.25 Gbit/s
X X 5 6 7 8
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
A
L L
P
16 16
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack supports slot segmentation. Slots 5, 6, and 7 can be
segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot
distribution is shown in Figure 3-6, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-7.
3-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 2 3 4 19 20 21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board S S S
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
L L L
SAP
O O O
T T T
5 6 7
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
S S S
L L L
O O O S S
T T T S S S S S
L L
19 20 21 L L L L L
O O S S S S
1.25 Gbit/s
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
S S S S O O O O O
T T L L L L
L L L L T T T T T
9 10 O O O O
O O O O 8 11 12 13 14
T T T T
T T T T S S S
C C 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 L L L S
O O O X X 5 6 7 8
1.25 Gbit/s
A
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
T T T L L
P
5 6 7 16 16
1.25 Gbit/s
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)

Service interface boards: slots 1–4, slots 15–18
3-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Service processing boards: slots 5–8 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing boards: slots 5–8, slots 11–13, and slots 19–21 (after slot
segmentation)
CXL boards: slots 9–10
SAP boards: slot 14

SEI auxiliary interface boards: auxiliary interface area
Fan units: slot 24 and slot 25

Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots for
Slot for Slot for processing Slots for corresponding
corresponding
processing boards boards interface boards
interface boards
Slot 6 (Note) Slots 2 Slot 20 (Note) Slots 1
Slot 7 (Note) Slots 4 Slot 21 (Note) Slots 3

Note: The slot is half-height slot after slot segmentation.

Table 3-8 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots and After slot
Before slot segmentation
capacity segmentation
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 5–Slot
Slot 7, Slot
19–Slot 20
Gbit/s )
21 (1.25
6 , Slot
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Boards
N1SF16, 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SL16(A),
N1/N2SLQ4
N1/N2SLD4 9 9 9 9 9
3-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

(1.25 Gbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 5–Slot
Slot 7, Slot
19–Slot 20
Gbit/s )
21 (1.25
6 , Slot
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Boards
N1/N2SL4, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note 1)
R1SLD4 9
R1SL4, 9 9
R1SLQ1, R1SL1
N1SEP (work 9 9 9 9
with interface
boards) (Note 2)
N1SEP1 (led out 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

from front panel)
(Note 2)
N1/N2SPQ4, 9 9 9 9
N1PD3, N1PL3
N1PL3A 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1PQ1, N1PQM 9 9 9 9 9
R1PD1 9 9
R1EFT4 9 9
N1EFS4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1/N2EFS0 9 9 9 9
N2EGS2, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1EGT2,
N2EGR2
N1EFT8 (work 9 9 9
with interface
boards)
N1EFT8 (led out 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

from front panel)
N2EMR0 (work 9 9 9 9
with interface
boards)
3-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

(1.25 Gbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 5–Slot
Slot 7, Slot
19–Slot 20
Gbit/s )
21 (1.25
6 , Slot
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Boards
N2EMR0 (led 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
out from front
panel)
N1ADL4, 9 9 9 9 9
N1ADQ1
N1IDQ1, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1IDL4 (Note 3)
N1MR2A 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1MR2B 9 9
N1MR2C (Note
4)
N1LWX 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1DCU, N1BA2, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1BPA
Note 1: The SLT1 provides 1–4 optical interfaces when in slots 1–4. The SLT1 provides 1–12 optical interfaces
when in slots 7–slot 8 or slot 11–slot 12. The SLT1 provides 1–8 optical interfaces when in slot 13.
2. Interface Boards
3-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 3-9 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 18
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Boards
N1EU08 9 9 9
N1EU08A 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1OU08 9 9 9
(LC type)
N2OU08 9 9 9
(SC type)
N1EU04 9 9 9 9
N1MU04 9 9 9 9
N1C34S 9 9 9 9
N1D34S 9 9 9 9
N1D75S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1D12S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1D12B 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1ETF8 9 9 9 9
N1EFF8 9 9 9 9
N1ETS8 9 9 9 9
N1TSB8 9 9
3. Other Boards
Table 3-10 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots
Slot 101–slot 102
Slot 22–slot 23
Slot 24–slot 25
Slot 9–slot 10
SEI area
Slot 14
Slot 50
Boards
Q1CXL1/4/16, 9
Q2CXL1/4/16/1
6A (physical
board) (Note 1)
3-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slots
Slot 101–slot 102

Slot 22–slot 23
Slot 24–slot 25
Slot 9–slot 10
SEI area
Slot 14
Slot 50
Boards
SCC,GSCC slot 82–slot

(logical board) 83
CXL, ECXL slot 80–slot

(logical board) 81
Q1SL1/4/16/16 9
A (logical board)
Q1SAP 9
Q1PIU 9
Q1SEI 9
N1FAN (Note 2) 9
61COA, 62COA 9
(Note 2)
CAU (Note 2) 9
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 2500.
It seats in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and
SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 9–10.
Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots,
not physical slots.

Table 3-11 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500.
Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
Weight 17 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and
fans)
3-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

The OptiX OSN 2500 REG is used to regenerate STM-16 and STM-64 signals.
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG uses the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The subrack structure
and slot assignment are the same as those of the OptiX OSN 2500. This section
mainly describes the basic configuration of the REG.
Table 3-12 associates OptiX OSN 2500 REG boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slots and
Slot 22 –slot 23
Slot 24–slot 25
capacity
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
622 Mbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
SEI area
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Boards
N1SL16 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1SL16A 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1SF16 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Q1CRG 9 9
Q1SAP 9
Q1PIU 9
N1FAN 9
Q1SEI 9
N1BA2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1BPA 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1DCU 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG can also be configured with N1BPA, N1BA2, N1DCU and
external equipment like UPM and COA as required. For their specific slots, see Table
3-10.
3-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A

OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan
area, PIU area and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-8.
4
6
1. Fan area 2. Board area 3. PIU area

4. Board area 5. Fiber routing area 6. Mounting ear
Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board area: for holding the boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Fan area: housing one fan box, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing two PIU boards, providing power for the OptiX OSN 1500A
The OptiX OSN 1500A has 11 slots before slot segmentation. Figure 3-9 shows the
slot distribution.
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL16/4/1 Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 Slot 10 AUX
Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)
3-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
The OptiX OSN 1500A supports slot segmentation. Slots 12 and 13 can be
distribution is shown in Figure 3-10.
Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 12 Slot 7

Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)
Figure 3-11 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Slot
XCS A 1 Slot 11 XCS B 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 6
Slot 2/12 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot20
Slot 3/13 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 5 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 10
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A
The access capacity for slot 12 or slot 13 is 2.5 Gbit/s before slot segmentation. After
slot segmentation, the access capacity for half-height slot 2, slot 3, slot 12 or slot 13 is
1.25 Gbit/s.

Service processing boards: slots 6–9 and slots 12–13 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing boards: slot 6–9, slot 12–13, slot 2–3 (after slot segmentation)
CXL boards: slots 4–5
EOW boards: slot 9

Fan units: slot 20
3-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots and Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation
capacity
Slot 12–slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 2
Slot 3
Boards
N1SF16, 9
N1/N2SL16(A),
N1/N2SLQ4,
N1/N2SLD4,
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note 1)
N1SEP1 (led out 9

from front panel)
R1SLD4, 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
R1SL4,
R1SLQ1, R1SL1
R1PD1A, 9 9
R1PD1B
R1PL1A, 9 9 9 9
R1PL1B
N1PL3A 9
R1L75S, 9 9
R1L12S
N1EFS4 9
R1EFT4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N2EGS2, 9
N1EGT2,
N2EGR2
N1EFT8 (led out 9

from front panel)
N1/N2EMR0 9
(led out from
front panel)
N1ADL4, 9
N1ADQ1
N1IDQ1, 9
N1IDL4
N1MR2A 9
3-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slots and Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation

capacity
Slot 12–slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(1.25 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 2
Slot 3
Boards
N1MR2B 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1LWX 9
N1DCU, N1BA2, 9
N1BPA
Note: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A provides 1–12 optical interfaces.
2. Other Boards
Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Boards
Slot 101–slot 102

Slot 1, slot 11
Slot 4–slot 5
Slot 10
Slot 20
Slot 50
Slot 9
Slots
Q1CXL1/4/16, 9
Q2CXL1/4/16/16
A (physical
board) (Note 1)
SCC, GSCC Slots 82, -

(logical board) 83
CXL, ECXL Slots 80,

(logical board) 81
Q1SL1/4/16/16A 9
L (logical board)
R1EOW 9
R1AUX, R2AUX 9
R1PIUA 9
R1FAN (Note 1) 9
61COA, 62COA 9
(Note 1)
3-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Boards
Slot 101–slot 102

Slot 1, slot 11
Slot 4–slot 5
Slot 10
Slot 20
Slot 50
Slot 9
Slots
CAU (Note 1) 9
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500.
It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL,
SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5.
Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, 62COA , and CAU are logical slots,
not physical slots.

Table 3-15 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A equipment.
Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Dimensions 131mm mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 262 mm (D)
Weight 8 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)
3-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B

OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
3.5.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into processing board
area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and PIU area, as shown
in Figure 3-12.
2
3
5
7
1. Interface board area 2. PIU area 3. Fan area

4. Processing board area 5. Auxiliary interface area 6. Fiber routing area
7. Mounting ear
Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Processing board area: for holding the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Interface board area: for holding the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock
interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on
Fan area: housing one fan module, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for equipment
ESD area: located above the fan box.
3-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The OptiX OSN 1500B has four slots for interface boards on upper layer and ten slots
(including slot 4 and slot 5) for processing boards before slot segmentation. Figure
3-13 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-14 shows the access capacity for the OptiX
OSN 1500B.
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 13 Slot 8
Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 6 622 Mbit/s
Slot 20 Slot 12 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 7 622 Mbit/s

Slot 13 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 8 622 Mbit/s
FAN Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 622 Mbit/s
Slot 5 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX
Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 1500B supports slot segmentation. Slots 11, 12, and13 can be
distribution is shown in Figure 3-15, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-16.
3-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17

Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 1 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 11 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 6 622 Mbit/s
Slot 20 Slot 2 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 12 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 7 622 Mbit/s
Slot 3 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 13 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 8 622 Mbit/s
FAN Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 622 Mbit/s
Slot 5 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)

Service interface boards: slots 14–17

Service processing board: slots 4–9 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing board: slots 1–9 and slots 11–13 (after slot segmentation)
CXL board: slots 4–5

Orderwire boards: slot 9 (also for the processing boards)
Fan units: slot 20
Power interface boards: slots 18 and 19

3-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot for processing boards Slot for corresponding interface boards
Slot 2 Slot 14
Slot 3 Slot 16
Slot 7 Slot 15
Slot 8 Slot 17
Slot 12 Slots 14, 15
Slot 13 Slots 16, 17

Note: The interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 boards can only be
inserted in corresponding slots in even number. Slot 12 and slot 7 share slot 15 for interface boards.
Slot 13 and slot 8 share slot 17 for interface boards.

Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot 11,slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 1–slot 3
(622 Mbit/s)
(622 Mbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Boards
N1SF16, 9 9 9
N1/N2SL16(A),
N1/N2SLQ4,
N1/N2SLD4,
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note 1)
R1SLD4 9 9
R1SL4, 9 9 9 9 9 9
R1SLQ1, R1SL1
N1SEP (work 9 9
with interface
boards) (Note 2)
N1SEP1 (led out 9 9 9

from front panel)
(Note 2)
3-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Slot 11,slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 1–slot 3
(622 Mbit/s)
(622 Mbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Boards
N1/N2SPQ4, 9 9
N1PD3, N1PL3
N1PL3A 9 9 9
N1PQ1, N1PQM 9 9 9
R1PD1 9 9 9 9 9
R1PL1A, 9 9 9 9
R1PL1B
R1EFT4 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1EFS4 9 9 9
N1/N2EFS0 9 9
N2EGS2, 9 9 9
N1EGT2,
N2EGR2
N1EFT8 (work 9 9
with interface
boards)
N1EFT8 (led out 9 9 9

from front panel)
N2EMR0 (work 9 9
with interface
boards)
N2EMR0 (led 9 9 9
out from front
panel)
N1ADL4, 9 9 9
N1ADQ1
N1IDQ1, 9 9 9
N1IDL4 (Note 3)
N1MR2A 9 9 9
N1MR2B 9 9 9 9 9 9
N1MR2C (Note
4)
3-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Slot 11,slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(1.25 Gbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 1–slot 3
(622 Mbit/s)
(622 Mbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Boards
N1LWX 9 9 9
N1DCU, N1BA2, 9 9 9
N1BPA
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B provides 1–12 optical interfaces.
Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 14–17.
2. Interface Boards
Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Boards
N1EU08 9 9
N1OU08 (LC 9 9
type)
N2OU08 (SC 9 9
type)
N1EU04 9 9
N1MU04 9 9
N1D34S 9 9
N1D75S 9 9 9 9
N1D12S 9 9 9 9
N1D12B 9 9 9 9
N1ETF8 9 9
N1EFF8 9 9
N1ETS8 9
N1TSB8 9
3-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3. Other Boards
Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots
Slot 18, slot 19
Slot 101–slot
Slot 4–slot 5
Slot 10
Slot 20
Slot 50
Slot 9
102
Boards
Q1CXL1/4/16, 9
Q2CXL1/4/16/1
6A (physical
board) (Note 1)
SCC, GSCC Slot

(logical board) 82, 83
CXL, ECXL Slot

(Logical board) 80, 81
Q1SL1/4/16/16 9
AL (logical
board)
R1EOW 9
R1AUX, R2AUX 9
R1PIU 9
R1FAN (Note 2) 9
61COA, 62COA 9
(Note 2)
3-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slots
Slot 18, slot 19
Slot 101–slot
Slot 4–slot 5
Slot 10
Slot 20
Slot 50
Slot 9
102
Boards
CAU (Note 2) 9
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL,
SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5.
Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots,
not physical slots.

Table 3-20 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Weight 9 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)
3-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Board Classification and List
4 Board Classification and List
This chapter introduces the classification and appearance of the boards of the OptiX
OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
4.1 Board Classification
Most boards of the OptiX OSN products are interchangeable. The same boards can
be used either in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 or in the OptiX OSN 1500
equipment. This section classifies the boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 by function.
Boards are classified into the following types.
SDH boards
PDH boards
Data processing boards
Cross-Connect and SCC boards
Other boards
4.1.1 SDH Boards
Table 4-1 lists the SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
4-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 4-1 SDH boards

Product Description 3500 3500 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
(40 Gbit/s) (80 Gbit/s)
Board
N2SL64 STM-64 √ √
processing board
N1SL16(A) STM-16 √ √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N2SL16(A) STM-16 √ √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N1SF16 STM-16 √ √ √ √ √ √
processing board
with FEC
N1SLQ4 4 x STM-4 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N1SLD4 2 x STM-4 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N1SL4 1 x STM-4 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N2SL4 1 x STM-4 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N2SLQ1 4 x STM-1 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N1SL1 1 x STM-1 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
N2SL1 1 x STM-1 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 √ √ √
processing board
(half-height slot)
R1SL4 1 x STM-4 √ √ √
processing board
(half-height slot)
4-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Product Description 3500 3500 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

(40 Gbit/s) (80 Gbit/s)
Board
R1SLQ1 4x STM-1 √ √ √
processing board
(half-height slot)
R1SL1 1x STM-1 √ √ √
processing board
(half-height slot)
N1SEP1 STM-1 processing √ √ √ √ √

board(led out from
front panel)
N1SEP STM-1 processing √ √ √ √ √

board(work with
interface boards)
N1EU08 8 x STM-1 √ √ √
interface board (e)
N1EU08A 8 x STM-1 √ √ √
interface board (e)
N1EU04 4 x STM-1 √ √
interface board (e)
N1OU08 8 x STM-1 √ √ √
interface board (o)
N2OU08 8 x STM-1 √ √ √
interface board (o)
N1TSB8 8-channel √ √ √ √
switching &
bridging board
4.1.2 PDH Boards

Table 4-2 lists the PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Table 4-2 PDH boards
Product 3500 3500

Description 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
Board (40 Gbit/s) (80 Gbit/s)
63 x E1 processing
N1PQ1 √ √ √ √
board
32 x E1 processing
R1PD1 A/B √ √ √
board(75 Ω/120 Ω)
16 x E1 processing
R1PL1 A/B board (75 Ω/120 √ √
Ω)
4-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Product 3500 3500

Description 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
16 x 75Ω E1/T1
R1L75S switching interface √
board
16 x 120Ω E1/T1
R1L12S switching interface √
board
63 x T1/E1
N1PQM √ √ √ √
processing board
6 x E3/DS3
N1PD3 √ √ √ √
processing board
3 x E3/DS3
N1PL3 √ √ √ √
processing board
3 x E3/DS3
N1PL3A √ √ √ √ √
processing board
4 x E4/STM-1
N1SPQ4 √ √ √ √
processing board
4 x E4/STM-1
N2SPQ4 √ √ √ √
processing board
32 x 75Ω E1/T1
N1D75S switching interface √ √ √ √
board
32 x 120Ω E1/T1
N1D12S switching interface √ √ √ √
board
32 x 120Ω E1/T1
N1D12B √ √ √ √
interface board
6 x E3/DS3 PDH
N1D34S √ √ √ √
interface board
3 x E3/DS3 PDH
N1C34S √ √ √ √
interface board
4 x E4/STM-1
N1MU04 √ √ √ √
interface board
8-channel
N1TSB8 switching & √ √ √ √
bridging board
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards

Table 4-3 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN products,
including ATM boards and Ethernet boards.
4-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 4-3 Data processing boards
Product Description 3500 3500

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
4-port FE
N1EFS4 processing board √ √ √ √ √
with L2 switching
FE processing
N1EFS0 board with L2 √ √ √ √
switching
FE processing
N2EFS0 board with L2 √ √ √ √
switching
2-port Gigabit
Ethernet
N1EGS2 √ √ √ √ √
switching
processing board
2-port Gigabit
Ethernet
N2EGS2 √ √ √ √ √
switching
processing board
2-port Gigabit
Ethernet
N1EGT2 transparent √ √ √ √ √
transmission
board
16-port Fast
Ethernet
N1EFT8 transparent √ √ √ √ √
transmission
board
4-port Fast
Ethernet
R1EFT4 transparent √ √ √
transmission
board
4 GE Ethernet
transparent
N1EGS4 transmission and √ √ √ √ √
convergence
board
12 FE ＋ 1 GE
Ethernet
N1EMR0 processing board √ √ √ √ √
with RPR
function
N2EMR0 12 FE ＋ 1 GE √ √ √ √ √
Ethernet
4-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Product Description 3500 3500

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
processing board
with RPR
function
2-port GE
processing board
N1EGR2 √ √ √ √ √
with RPR
function
2-port GE
processing board
N2EGR2 √ √ √ √ √
with RPR
function
8-port 10/100M
N1EFF8 Ethernet optical √ √ √ √
interface board
8-port 10/100M
BaseT fast
N1ETF8 √ √ √ √
Ethernet
interface board
8-port 10/100M
BaseT Ethernet
N1ETS8 √ √ √ √
interface
switching board
1 x STM-4 ATM
N1ADL4 service √ √ √ √ √
processing board
4 x STM-1ATM
N1ADQ1 service √ √ √ √ √
processing board
1 x STM-4 ATM
service
N1IDL4 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
with IMA (Note 1)
4 x STM-1 ATM
service
N1IDQ1 √ √ √ √ √
processing board
with IMA (Note 1)
4 x multi-service
transparent
N1MST4 √ √ √ √ √
transmission
processing board
Note 1: IMA is a kind of function named inverse multiplexing ATM.
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards
4-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 4-4 lists the cross-connect and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN
products.
Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
Product Description 3500 (40 3500 (80
2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
Board Gbit/s) Gbit/s)
Cross-connect and
timing board (40
N1GXCSA Gbit/s higher √
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
Cross-connect and
timing board (40
N2GXCSA Gbit/s higher √
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
Enhanced
cross-connect and
timing board
N1EXCSA √
(80Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
Super
cross-connect and
timing board (80
N1UXCSA √
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
Super
cross-connect and
timing board (80
N1UXCSB higher order, 20 √
Gbit/s lower order,
supporting
extended subrack)
Lower order
cross-connect and
N1XCE timing board for √
extended subrack
(1.25 Gbit/s)
STM-1 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
Q1CXL1 timing board (20 √ √ √
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
4-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
STM-4 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
STM-16 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
STM-1 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
STM-4 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
STM-16 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
System control
and
N1SCC √ √
communication
board
System control
and
communication
N1GSCC √ √
board (supporting
intelligent
features)
4-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
System control
and
communication
N2GSCC √ √
board (supporting
intelligent
features)
System control,
communication
Q1CRG and timing board √
for OptiX OSN
2500 REG
4.1.5 Other Boards

Table 4-5 lists the other boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Table 4-5 Other boards
Product 3500 (40 3500 (80 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
Description Gbit/s) Gbit/s)
Board
N1MR2A 2-channel optical √ √ √ √ √
add/drop
multiplexing board
N1MR2B 2-channel optical √ √ √

add/drop
multiplexing board
(half-height slot)
N1MR2C 2-channel optical √ √ √ √

add/drop
multiplexing board
(interface area)
N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate √ √ √ √ √

wavelength
conversion board
N1BPA Booster amplifier √ √ √ √ √ √

and pre-amplifier
board
N1BA2 Booster amplifier √ √ √ √ √ √

board
N1DCU Dispersion √ √ √
compensate board
N1PIU Power interface √ √

board
4-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Product 3500 (40 3500 (80 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

Description Gbit/s) Gbit/s)
Board
Q1PIU Power interface √ √
board
R1PIU Power interface √

board
R2PIU Power interface √

board
N1FAN Fan board √ √ √ √
R1FAN Fan board √ √
N1FANA Fan board (large √ √

power)
R1EOW Orderwire board √ √
Q1SEI Extended signal √ √

interface board
Q1SAP System auxiliary √ √

processing board
N1AUX System auxiliary √ √

interface board
R1AUX System auxiliary √ √

interface board
R2AUX System auxiliary √ √

interface board
61COA/62CO External √ √ √ √ √ √
A case-shape optical
amplifier
TDA External tone & √ √ √ √ √ √

data access board
UPM External √ √ √ √
uninterruptible
power modules
4.2 Board Appearance

Figure 4-1 shows the board appearance of the OptiX OSN products.
4-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Optical interface 2. Ejector lever 3. Printed circuit board

Figure 4-1 Board appearance
Caution:
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD
wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Warning:
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface board and the optical interface,
lest the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
4-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 5 SDH Boards
5 SDH Boards
This chapter introduces the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Parameter configuration
Protection configuration
Version description
Technical parameters
The SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-1.
5.1 SL64
The SL64 is the 1 x STM-64 processing board.
Table 5-1 lists the slots for the SL64 board.
Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64
Product SL64
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) Slots 7–8, 11–12
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) Slots 8, 11
OptiX OSN 2500 Not available
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 1500A Not available
OptiX OSN 1500B Not available
5.1.1 Functionality
5-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Functionality SL64
Basic function Receive/Transmit one STM-64 optical signal.
Optical Support the I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 and V-64.2b (used with BA, PA, and
interface DCU) optical module, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691.
specifications Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM
equipment directly.
Optical module Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.
specifications Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Service Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4c
processing to STM-64-4c.
Overhead Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-64 signals.

processing Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).
Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.
Alarms and Provide abundant alarms and performance events.

performance
events
K byte Be able to process multiple sets of K bytes. One SL64 board can support up to four
processing multiplex section protection (MSP) rings.
REG Support setting and querying REG working mode.

specifications
Protection Support two-fiber and four-fiber MSP, linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection
schemes (SNCP).
Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP
rings.
Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces.

Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast.
Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services.
Support the query of board information.
Support the in-service uploading of FPGA.
Support smooth upgrade of board software.
5.1.2 Principle
Figure 5-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SL64.
5-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
O/E conversion module Backplane
O/E Cross-connect
STM-64 conversion SDH unit
MUX/ overhead
DEMUX processing Cross-connect
STM-64 E/O module unit
conversion
Logic control SCC unit

module
+5 V Power
+3.3 V module
+3.3 V (standby) +3.3 V
Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64
1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part.
The O/E conversion converts the received 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals into electrical
signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple
parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This
module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms.
The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the SDH
overhead processing module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or
inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals,
performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit
through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module.
2. In Transmit Direction
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the
parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the O/E
conversion module.
The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical
signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into
OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit:
− Generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL64.
− implements ALS function.
− realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical
processing boards constituting the ADM when the SCC is not online.
− control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the
5-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
active one is faulty.

Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.1.3 Front Panel
Figure 5-2 shows the front panels of the SL64.
SL64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL64
Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL64 board.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
2. Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair)
Type: LC connector
Security: The optical interfaces incline down.
5-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration

The major parameters required by the SL64 are as follows.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.
Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
Table 5-2 associates the C2 setting to the service type.
Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64
Service type Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1 TUG structure
E3 or DS3 34/45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service Unequipped
5.1.5 Version Description

The versions of the SL64 is N2. The SL64 N2 supports tandem connection monitoring
(TCM) function.

Table 5-3 list the technical parameters of the SL64. Table 5-4 lists the supported
optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T
Recommendation G.692.
Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64
Parameter Description
Bit rate 9.95 Gbit/s
Processing capability 1 x STM-64 standard service or concatenated service
Line code pattern Non return to zero (NRZ)
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.12
5-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Power consumption (W) 30
Type of optical interfaces I-64.2 S-64.2 L-64.2 Le-64. Ls-64. V-64.2b

b b 2 2 (BA+PA+
DCU)
(Note)
Wavelength (nm) 1550 1550 1550 1550 1550 1550.12
Transmission distance (km) 0 to 2 to 40 30 to 30 to 80 70 to 120

20 70 70
Launched power (dBm) –5 to –1 to 2 10 to 1 to 4 3 to 5 12 to 15

–1 14
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –14 –14 –14 –19.5 –21 –23
Receiver overload (dBm) –1 –1 –3 –9 –9 –7
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

(dB)
Maximum dispersion 500 800 1600 1200 1600 800

tolerance (ps/nm)
Long-term operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C

condition Humidity: 10% to 90%
Short-term operating Temperature: –5°C to 50°C

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C

Humidity: 10% to 100%
Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C

transportation Humidity: 10% to 100%
Note: The bracketed part indicates that V-64.2b optical interface specification consists of booster
amplifier (BA), preamplifier (PA) , and the dispersion compensation unit (DCU).
Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692
Classification code 1 x 29 dB
Dispersion limit (km) 40
Mean launched power (dBm) –4 to –1
Minimum sensitivity (dBm) –17
Min. overload point (dBm) –1
Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm) 800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2
5-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.2 SF16/SL16
The SL16 is an STM-16 processing board. The SF16 is an STM-16 processing board
with FEC function. The two boards are responsible for STM-16 optical signal
processing.
Table 5-5 lists the slots for the SL16 andSF16.
Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16
Product SL16 SF16
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) Slots 5–8, 11–14 Slots 5–8, 11–14
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 7–8, 11–12 Slots 7–8, 11–12
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Slots 5–8, 11–13 Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13
5.2.1 Functionality
Functionality SL16 SF16
Basic function Receive/Transmit one STM-16 optical signal Receive/Transmit one OTU1 (2.66 Gbit/s,
FEC) optical signal.
Support enabling or disabling FEC function.
Optical Support the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, Support the Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, and
interface L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (used with BA), and Ue-16.2e optical interface.
specifications U-16.2Je (used with BA and PA) optical Support long distance transmission, up to
interface, which complies with ITU-T 200 km.
Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed
Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access
wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.
DWDM equipment directly.
Optical Support detecting and query of the Support detecting and query of the
module information on optical modules. information on optical modules.
specifications Laser can be open and close at optical Laser can be open and close at optical
interfaces. interfaces.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be Automatic laser shutdown function can be
enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Service Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the
processing concatenated services at levels from concatenated services at levels from
VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C. VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C.
The SF16 process overheads and the
encapsulation code of FEC in a way
complying with ITU-T Recommendation
G.709.
5-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Functionality SL16 SF16

Overhead Support the processing of the section Support the overhead processing,
processing overheads of STM-16 signals. performance monitoring, and alarm
Support the processing of the path detecting of the OTU, ODU, and OPU,
overheads (transparent transmission and complying with ITU-T Recommendation
termination). G.709.
Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Support the processing of the section
overheads of STM-16 signals.
Support the processing of the path
overheads (transparent transmission and
termination).
Alarms and Provide abundant alarms and performance events.

performance The SF16 provides the alarms and performance events related to OUT, ODU, OPU, and
events FEC.
K byte Be able to process multiple sets of K byte. One SL16/SF16 board can support up to two
processing MSP rings.
REG Support setting and querying REG working mode.

specifications
Protection Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and
schemes subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.

Support smooth upgrade of board software.
5.2.2 Principle
Figure 5-3 shows the principle block diagram of the SF16. The block diagram of the
SL16 is the same as that of the SF16 after removing the part surrounded by broken
line.
5-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
O/E conv ersion module Backplane
O/E Cross-connect
STM-16 Digital packet
conv ersion SDH unit
encapsulation
MUX/ ov erhead
and FEC
DEMUX processing
processing Cross-connect
STM-16 E/O module
module unit
conv ersion
Logic control SCC unit

module
+5 V
Power
+3.3 V module
+3.3 V (standby ) +3.3 V
Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part.
The O/E conversion converts the received 2.66 Gbit/s FEC optical signals into
electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same
time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms.
The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the digital
packet encapsulation and FEC processing module to have FEC packets
encapsulated/decapsulated and OTN overheads processed. There are connections
with clock and data signals between the digital packet encapsulation and FEC
processing module, the O/E conversion module, and the SDH overhead processing
module. Alarms related to FEC overhead processing are detected in this module.
The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the
received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then
sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and
R_OOF alarms are detected in this module.
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the
parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the
digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module.
The digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module performs FEC coding
and OTN overhead inserting to the multiple low rate signals, and then sends it to the
O/E conversion module.
The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical
signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into
OTN optical signals with FEC at 2.66 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for
transmission.
5-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
− generates timing clock and frame header information required by the
SF16/SL16.
processing boards constituting the ADM.
Power module
5.2.3 Front Panel
Figure 5-4 shows the front panels of the SL16 and the SF16.
SL16 SF16
STAT STAT
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
CLASS 1 CLASS 1
LASER LASER
PRODUCT PRODUCT
OUT OUT
IN IN
SL16 SF16
Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL16/SF16.
5-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2. Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair)
Type: LC connector
The optical interfaces of the SF16 are not swappable. The SL16 can use swappable
optical modules for easy maintenance.
The major parameters required by the SL16/SF16 are as follows.
J1
C2
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.
Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16

The version of the SF16 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be
used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and OptiX
OSN 1500. The board can be set to be under ADM mode or REG mode.
The versions of the SL16 are N1 and N2. The two versions realize board functions in
the same way. The N2SL16 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function,
which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other
directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware
5-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
replacing is fulfilled.
Note:
If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version
N2 with version N1 will fail.
The board named SL16A is not hot swappable for optical module, because the optical
interfaces are equipped with fixed optical modules.
Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 list the technical parameters of the SL16 and the SF16
respectively. Table 5-9 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed
wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692.
Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16
Processing 1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service

capability
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.10
Power consumption 20
(W)
Type of optical I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2 V-16.2 U-16.2Je

modules Je Je (BA) (BA+PA)
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550 1550 1550.12
Transmission 0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–1 80–14 140–17

distance (km) 00 0 0
Launched power –10 to –5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3 5 to 7 14 14

(dBm) –3
Receiver sensitivity –18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28 –33

(dBm)
Receiver overload –3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9 –10

(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

ratio (dB)
5-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


storage Humidity: 10% to 100%

Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16

Processing capability 1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.09
Specification of optical Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2e

interfaces (Note 1)
FEC+BA(14)+P FEC+BA(17)+PA FEC+BA(17)+R
A A+PA
Wavelength (nm) G.692-compliant G.692-compliant G.692-compliant

wavelength with wavelength with wavelength with
100 GHz interval 100 GHz interval 100 GHz interval
Transmission distance (km) 178 189 200
Launched power (dBm) –2 to +3 –2 to +3 –2 to +3

(Note 2)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –31 (APD) –31 (APD) –31 (APD)

(Note 2)
Receiver overload (dBm) –9 (APD) –9 (APD) –9 (APD)

(Note 2)
Minimum extinction ratio 10 10 10

(dB) (Note 2)

5-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Humidity: 10% to 100%

Note 1: The bracketed numbers indicate corresponding parameters. For example, “BA(14)” indicates the
optical power is 14 dBm after signals are amplified by BA. “FEC+BA+PA” indicates that the specifications of
optical interfaces consist of FEC, BA, and PA.
Note 2: Parameters listed in the above table are of the optical module only, but not of amplifiers.
Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692
Bit rate 2488320 kbit/s
Classification code 8 x 22 dB 5 x 30 dB 3 x 33 dB
Dispersion limit (km) 170 170 640
Mean launched power (dBm) –2 to 3 5 to 7 –5 to –1
Minimum sensitivity (dBm) –28 –28 –28
Min. overload point (dBm) –9 –9 –9
Maximum path allowable

3500 3500 12800
dispersion (ps/nm)
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 8.2 8.2
5-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
The SL4 is the 1 x STM-4 processing board. The SLD4 is the 2 x STM-4 processing
board. The SLQ4 is the 4 x STM-4 processing board.
The three boards are responsible for:
the receiving/transmitting of STM-4 optical signals
the O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals
the extracting/inserting of overhead byte
the detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-10 lists the slots for the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4.
Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
Product SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Slots 1–8, 11–17 Slots 1–8, 11–17 Slots 5–8, 11–14
Gbit/s)
Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–8, 11–13 Slots 7–8, 11–13 Slots 7–8, 11–12
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not available Not available Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13
5.3.1 Functionality
Functionality SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Basic function Receive/Transmit Receive/Transmit Receive/Transmit
one STM-4 optical two STM-4 optical four STM-4 optical
signal. signals. signals.
Optical interface Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface,
specifications which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
Optical module Support the detecting and query of the information on optical
specifications modules.
Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at
optical interfaces.
Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Service processing Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the VC-4-4C

concatenated services.
5-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Functionality SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

Overhead Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-4 signals.
processing Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent
transmission and termination).
Alarms and Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify
performance maintenance and administration.
events
Protection Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP),

schemes linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection.

Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to
services.
Support smooth board software upgrade.
5.3.2 Principle
Figure 5-5 shows the principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 (1 x STM-4
optical signal is processed).
Backplane
O/E
STM-4 Cross-connect unit
conversion Frame
module Overhead
synchronous
processing
E/O and scrambler
module
conversion module
module
Logic
control SCC
module
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
+3.3 V ( Standby ) +3.3 V
Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
5-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-4 optical signal into STM-4
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-4 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module,
where the R_LOS alarm is checked.
The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-4
electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead
processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-4
signal, and then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane bus.
Signals from the cross-connect unit are inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead
processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module.
The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion
for the received STM-4 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion
module after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-4 electrical signal into STM-4
optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
SL4/SLD4/SLQ4.
Power module
5.3.3 Front Panel
Figure 5-6 shows the front panels of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.
5-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

STAT
STAT STAT
ACT
ACT PROG ACT
PROG PROG
SRV
SRV SRV
CLASS1
CLASS1 CLASS1
LASER
LASER LASER
PRODUCT
PRODUCT PRODUCT
OUT
OUT1
OUT1
IN
IN1
IN1
OUT2
OUT2
IN2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.
2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL4, two pairs for the SLD4, and four
pairs for the SLQ4
Type: LC connector
The SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies
maintenance.
The major parameters required by the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are as follows.
J1
5-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
C2
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type.
Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

The versions of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are N1 and N2. The boards can be used in
the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).
The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ4 supports tandem
connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two
versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command
must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.
Note:

Table 5-12 lists the technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4.
Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4
SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
5-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Processing capability 1 x STM-4 standard 2 x STM-4 standard 4 x STM-4
or concatenated or concatenated standard or
service service concatenated
service
Connector LC
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.00 1.01 1.04
Power consumption 15 15 16
(W)
Optical module type I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550
Transmission distance 0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100

(km)
Launched power –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2

(dBm)
Receiver sensitivity –23 –28 –28 –28 –33

(dBm)
Receiver overload –8 –8 –8 –8 –8
(dBm)
Minimum extinction
8.2 8.2 10 10 10
ration (dB)




5-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1
The SLT1 is a 12 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical
processing board. The SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical processing board.
The three boards are responsible for:
the receiving/transmitting of STM-1 optical signals
the O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals
the extracting/inserting of overhead byte
the detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-13 shows the slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
Product SLT1 SLQ1 SL1
Gbit/s)
Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Not available Not available Not available

REG
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13
Note:
To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to fourth optical
interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first
to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or
11–13.
To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to eighth optical
interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first
to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or
11–13.
To the OptiX OSN 2500, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the
SLT1 seats in slot 5 or 6, the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the
SLT1 seats in any of slots 7–8 or 11–12, and the first to eight optical interfaces are
available when the SLT1 seats in 13th slot.
5-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.4.1 Functionality
Functionality SLT1 SLQ1 SL1
Receive/Transmit Receive/Transmit
Basic Receive/Transmit four
twelve STM-1 optical one STM-1 optical
function STM-1 optical signals.
signals. signal.
Optical
Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which
interface
comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
specifications
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.

Optical Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.
module Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at
specifications optical interfaces.
Service
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.
processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals.

Overhead Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent
processing transmission and termination).
Alarms and
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify
performance
maintenance and administration.
events
Protection Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP),

schemes linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces.

Maintenance
5.4.2 Principle
Figure 5-7 shows the principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 (1 x STM-1
signal is processed).
5-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Backplane
O/E
conversion Frame
module Overhead
synchronous
processing
E/O and scrambler
module
conversion module
module
Logic
control SCC
module
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
+3.3 V ( Standby ) +3.3 V
Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-1 optical signal into STM-1
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-1 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module,
where the R_LOS alarm is checked.
electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead
processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-1
signal, and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then
sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into an
STM-1 signal and inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and
then are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module.
for the received STM-1 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion
module after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-1 electrical signal into STM-1
optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
5-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

SLT1/SLQ1/SL1.
Power module
5.4.3 Front Panel
Figure 5-8 shows the front panels of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
SLT1 SLQ1 SL1

STAT STAT STAT
ACT ACT AC T
PROG PROG PROG
SRV SRV SRV
CLASS1 CLASS1
LASER LASER CLASS1
PRODUCT PRODUCT LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 OUT
IN1
OUT2
OUT1
IN2
IN
IN1
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
OUT2
OUT5
IN5
IN2
OUT6
IN6
OUT3
OUT7
IN7
IN3
OUT8
IN8
OUT9
OUT4
IN9
OUT10
IN4
IN10
OUT11
IN11
OUT12
IN12
SLT1
SLQ1 SL1
SLT1 SLQ1 SL1

Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
5-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL1, four pairs for the SLQ1, and twelve
pairs for the SLT1
Type: LC connector
Security: The optical interfaces of the SLQ1 and the SL1 incline down. The optical
interfaces of the SLT1 are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm.
The SL1, SLQ1, and SLT1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies
maintenance.
The major parameters required by the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 are as follows.
J1
C2
Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

The versions of the SLQ1 and SL1 are N1 and N2, which can be used in the OptiX
OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).
The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ1 supports tandem
connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two
versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command
must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.
The version of the SLT1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be
used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).
5-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Note:

Table 5-15 lists the technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
SLT1 SLQ1 SL1
Bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s
Processing 12 x STM-1 4 x STM-1 1 x STM-1

capability
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.22 1.04 1.00
Power 15 15 14
consumption (W)
Optical interface I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2

type
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550
Transmission 0 to 2 2 to 15 15 to 40 40 to 80 80 to 100
distance (km)
Launched power –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 2

(dBm)
Receiver –23 –28 –34 –34 –34

sensitivity (dBm)

(dBm)
Minimum 8.2 8.2 10 10 10

extinction ration
(dB)
Long-term Temperature: 0°C to 45°C

operating condition Humidity: 10% to 90%
Short-term Temperature: –5°C to 50°C

5-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
SLT1 SLQ1 SL1

5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1
The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SL4 is a 1 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SLD4 and the R1SL4 are responsible for:
The receiving or transmitting of STM-4 optical signals
The O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals
The extracting or inserting of overhead byte
The detecting of alarms in the line
The R1SLQ1 and the R1SL1 are responsible for:
The receiving or transmitting of STM-1 optical signals
The O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals
The extracting/inserting of overhead byte
The detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-16 lists the slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 in OSN products.
Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1
Product R1SLQ1 R1SL1 R1SLD4 R1SL4
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Not available Not available Not available Not available
Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Not available Not available Not available Not available
Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–7, Slots 5–7, Slots 7, 21 Slots 5–7,
19–21 19–21 19–21
OptiX OSN 2500 Not available Not available Not available Not available
REG
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 6–9, Slots 6–9, Slots 6–9, Slots 6–9,
12–13 12–13 12–13 12–13
5-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Product R1SLQ1 R1SL1 R1SLD4 R1SL4

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 1–3, Slots 1–3, Slots 1–3, Slots 1–3,
6–9, 11–13 6–9, 11–13 11–13 6–9, 11–13
5.5.1 Functionality
Functionality R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1 R1SL1
Basic function Receive/Transmit Receive/Transmit Receive/Transmit Receive/Transmit
1 x STM-4 optical 2 x STM-4 optical 4 x STM-1 optical 1 x STM-1 optical
signal. signals. signals. signal.
Optical Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2,
interface and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which
specifications comply with ITU-T Recommendation comply with ITU-T Recommendation
G.957. G.957.
Service Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.

processing and VC-4-4C concatenated services.
Overhead Support the processing of the section Support the processing of the section
processing overheads of STM-4 signals. overheads of STM-1 signals.
Support the processing of the path Support the processing of the path
overheads (transparent transmission overheads (transparent transmission
and termination). and termination).
Support setting and querying Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2
J0/J1/C2 byte. byte.
Protection Support two-fiber and four-fiber Support linear MSP and SNCP.
schemes multiplex section protection (MSP),
linear MSP and SNCP.
Support MSP or SNCP shared optical
path protection.
Optical Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.
module Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.
specifications
Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical
interfaces.
Alarms and Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance
performance and administration.
events

5-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.5.2 Principle
The principle of the R1SLD4/R1SL4 is the same as that of the SL4. Refer to Figure
5-5 for details.
The principle of the R1SLQ1/R1SL1 is the same as that of the SL1. Refer to Figure
5-7 for details.
5.5.3 Front Panel
Figure 5-9 shows the front panels of the R1SLD4 and R1SL4. Figure 5-10 shows the
front panels of the R1SLQ1 and R1SL1.
R1SL4 R1SLD4
Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4
R1SLQ1 R1SL1
Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1
5-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 are half-slot optical processing boards
whose height is half of the SL4’s. They are used when the slots of the OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are segmented.
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1.
2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the R1SL4, two pairs for the R1SLD4, four
pairs for the R1SLQ1, and one pair for the R1SL1
Type: LC connector
Security: The optical interfaces are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm.
The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 support swappable optical modules,
which simplifies maintenance.
The major parameters required by the half-slot optical processing boards are as
follows.
J1
C2
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type.
Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards
5-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The version of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 is N1, which is the only
version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A,
and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation.
The optical interface parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL are the
same as that of the SL4 and SL1. Refer to Table 5-12 and Table 5-15 for details. Table
5-18 lists other technical parameters.
Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1
R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1 R1SL1
Bit rate 622.080 Mbit/s 155.520 Mbit/s
Processing 1 x STM-4 2 x STM-4 4 x STM-1 1 x STM-1

capability standard or standard or standard standard
concatenated concatenated services services
services services
Dimensions (mm) H
D
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 0.34 0.36 0.4 0.34
Power 10 11 12 10
consumption (W)




5-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8
The SEP1 is an 8 x STM-1 electrical signal processing board, with two STM-1
electrical interfaces on the front panel.
The EU08 and OU08are interface boards of the SEP1. The TSB8 is an electrical
interface switching & bridging board.
Table 5-19 lists the slots for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 in OSN products.
Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
SEP1 SEP
Product (Led out from (Work with EU08/OU08 TSB8
front panel) interface boards)
Slots 19, 21,
OptiX OSN 3500 Slots 19,
Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 2–5, 13–16 23, 25, 29, 31,
(80 Gbit/s) 35
33, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 Slots 19,

Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 2–5, 13–16 Not available
(40 Gbit/s) 35
Slots 1,
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–8, 11–13 Slots 6–7, 12–13 Slots 3, 15, 17
17
OptiX OSN 2500 Not

Not available Not available Not available
REG available
OptiX OSN Not

Slots 12–13 Not available Not available
1500A available
OptiX OSN
Slots 11–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 14, 16 Slots 14
1500B
When used with different interface boards and electrical interface switching & bridging
boards, the SEP1 has different access ability, as listed in Table 5-20.
Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1
When worked with Access ability
None Access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals.
EU08 Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals.
OU08 Access and process 8 x STM-1 optical signals.
EU08 and TSB8 Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve 1:N
(N≤3) TPS protection.
Caution:
The two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are unavailable when used with
interface boards.
5-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Caution:
The EU08 and OU08 can only be used when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s
in OptiX OSN 3500. When the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the EU04 can be
used to work with the SEP1.
5.6.1 Functionality
Functionality SEP1 EU08/OU08 TSB8
EU08: 8 x STM-1 electrical
interface board 8-channel electrical
Basic 8 x STM-1
interface switching &
function processing board OU08: 8 x STM-1 optical bridging board
interface board
The OU08 supports the I-1

Optical
and S-1.1 optical interface,
interface _ _
which complies with ITU-T
specifications
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.

Optical Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.
module Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical
specifications interfaces.
Service
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.
processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals.

Overhead Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission
processing and termination).
Alarms and
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify
performance
maintenance and administration.
events
Realize TPS protection when the SEP1 works with interface boards and
Protection switching & bridging boards.
scheme Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP),
linear MSP and SNCP.
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces.

Maintenance
5-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
5.6.2 Principle
Figure 5-11 shows the principle block diagram of the SEP1 (1 x STM-1 signal is
processed).
Backplane
STM-1 O/E signal

Cross-connect unit
Data Frame
Overhead
Interface recovery synchronous
processing
module module and scrambler
module
module
STM-1 O/E signal Cross-connect unit
Logic
control SCC
module
+3.3 V （Standby） +3.3 V（Standby）
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1
The interface module accesses STM-1 electrical signals (for optical signals, O/E
conversion is needed), and the data recovery module recovers clock signals. Then,
the cock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous
and scrambler module.
electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and then sends them to the
overhead processing module.
The overhead processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the STM-1 signals,
and demultiplexes the signals into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then
sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into
STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and sent to the frame synchronous
and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes.
for the received STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface module
after scrambling.
The interface module sends the STM-1 electrical signals to the cable for transmission.
When optical signals are required, the interface module adopts the OU08, where the
signals are sent to fiber after E/O conversion.
5-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
− communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.
− collects and reports alarms and performance events.
− process the configuration command from NM.
Power module
5.6.3 Front Panel
Figure 5-12 shows the front panels of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.
SEP1 EU08 OU08 TSB8

STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
OUT1IN1OUT2IN2OUT3IN3OUT4IN4OUT5IN5OUT6IN6OUT7IN7OUT8IN8
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
SEP1 EU08 OU08 TSB8
SEP1 EU08 OU08 (LC) TSB8

Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SEP1.
5-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

There are no indicators on the EU08, OU08, or TSB8.
2. Interfaces
Quantity: The SEP1 has two pair of 75-ohm SMB interface, with which the SEP1 can
access two channels of STM-1 electrical signal by itself.
Type: SMB connector
Table 5-21 lists the quantity and type of the interfaces of the EU08 and OU08.
Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08
Interface EU08 N1OU08 N2OU08
Quantity 8 8 8
Access ability 8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(o) 8 x STM-1(o)
8-pair SMB electrical 8-pair LC optical 8-pair SC optical

Type
interface interface interface
Swappable optical
— Supported Not supported
module
The N1OU08 supports swappable optical modules, which simplifies the maintenance
to optical modules.
There is no service interfaces on the TSB8.
5.6.4 Protection Configuration
When used with the EU08 and TSB8, the SEP1 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 8
x STM-1 electrical signals. Table 5-22 lists the TPS protection of the SEP1 in OSN
products.
Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1
Product TPS protection TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 Support two groups of The board in slot 2 protects the boards in
(80 Gbit/s) 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection slots 3, 4, and 5.
The board in slot 16 protects the boards
OptiX OSN 3500
in slots 13, 14, and 15.
(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Support two groups of 1:1 The board in slot 6 protects the one in
TPS protection slot 7.
The board in slot 13 protects the one in
slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500 Not supported —

REG
OptiX OSN Not supported —

1500A
5-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

OptiX OSN Support one group of 1:1 The board in slot 12 protects the one in
1500B TPS protection slot 13.
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the

protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated
network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
1. Protection Principle
Figure 5-13 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SEP1 is used with the EU08 and
TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(e)
Switch control
signal
TSB8 EU08 EU08 EU08
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cross
connect
board
SLOT 9/10
Protection Working Working Working
SEP1 SEP1 SEP1 SEP1
Fail
SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 SLOT 5

Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the
SEP1 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08.
Switching status
When a working SEP1 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following
manners.
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8
does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.
5-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SEP1, the
relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-14.
S S S S SS S S S S S S S SS SS S S
L L L L LL L L L L L L L LL LL L L
O O O O OO O O O O O O O OO OO O O
T T T T TT T T T T T T T TT TT T T
1920212223242526 27 28 2930313233343536 37
TSB8
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
TSB8
AUX
PIU
PIU
FAN FAN FAN
O O O O O O O O O O O OOOOO OO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213141516 1718
Protection 1
Protection 2
Working 1
Working 1
Working 1
Working 2
Working 2
Working 2
SCC
XCS
XCS
Fiber routing
Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In the Figure 5-14, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the
board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15.
The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-23.
Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Protection group 1 Protection group 2
Protection SEP1 Slot 2 Slot 16
TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35
Working SEP1 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15
EU08 Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the
5-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Protection 1
Protection 2
Working 1
Working 2
CXL16
CXL16
SAP
Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
In the above figure, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot
13 protects the one in slot 12.
Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Protection SEP1 Slot 6 Slot 13
TSB8 Slot 1 Slot 17
Working SEP1 Slot 7 Slot 12
EU08 Slot 3 Slot 15
4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B

When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation
between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-16.
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16 EU08
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 12 Protection Slot 7

Slot 3 Slot 13 Working Slot 8
Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
5-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Protection group
Protection SEP1 Slot 12
TSB8 Slot 14
Working SEP1 Slot 13
EU08 Slot 16

The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SEP1.
J1
C2
Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1
Service type C2 setting
E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

The version of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed.
The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN
1500B.
The OU08 has version N1 and version N2. The optical interface of version N1 is of LC
connector, and that of version N2 is of SC connector. The two versions provide the
same functions.
Table 5-27 lists the technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.
5-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
SEP1 EU08 OU08 TSB8
Access 2 channels of 8 channels of 8 channels of -

capability electrical signals electrical optical signals
signals
Processing 8 x STM-1 - - -
capability
Line code CMI NRZ

pattern
Connector SMB SMB LC or SC -
Dimensions 262.05 (H) x 220 H

(mm) (D) x 25.4 (W) D
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) W
Weight (kg) 0.95 0.41 0.41 0.28
Power 17 11 6 5
consumption
(W)
Optical module - I-1, S-1.1 -

type
Wavelength - 1310 -
(nm)
Transmission - 0–15 -
distance (km)
Launched power - –15 to –8 -

(dBm)
Receiver - –38 -
sensitivity (dBm)

operating Humidity: 10%–90%
condition

condition

storage Humidity: 10%–100%

transportation Humidity: 10%–100%
5-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 6 PDH Boards
6 PDH Boards
This chapter introduces the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
The PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-2.
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8
The SPQ4 is a 4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board. The MU04 is a 4 x E4/STM-1
interface board.
The SPQ4 works with the MU04 to access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical
signals. The SPQ4 and MU04 work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection.
Table 6-1 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8.
Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8
Product SPQ4 MU04 TSB8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Slots 2–5, 13–16 Slots 19, 21, 23, Slots 19, 35
Gbit/s) 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Slots 2–5, 13–16 Slots 19, 21, 23, Slots 19, 35
Gbit/s) 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 6–7, 12–13 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17 Slots 1, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not available Not available Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A Not available Not available Not available
6-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Product SPQ4 MU04 TSB8

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 12–13 Slots 14, 16 Slot 14
6.1.2 Functionality
Functionality SPQ4 MU04 TSB8
Basic 4 x E4/STM-1(e) 4 x E4/STM-1(e) 8-channel electrical
function processing board interface board interface switching &
bridging board
Service Access and process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals. Each path can carry
processing both E4 and STM-1 electrical signals.
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services
Overhead Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals,

processing including B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1–D12.
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent
transmission and termination), including J1, B3, C2, G1, and H4.
events
Protection The SPQ4 supports TPS protection when working with interface
schemes boards and switching & bridging boards.
Supports two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP),
linear MSP, and SNCP.

6.1.3 Principle
Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SPQ4.
6-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Backplane
E4/STM-1
electrical signal Cross-connect unit
Data Frame
Interface Overhead
recovery synchronous
module processing
module and scrambler
(MU04) module
E4/STM-1 module
electrical signal Cross-connect unit
Logic
control SCC
module
+3.3 V（Standby）
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4
The interface unit (MU04) accesses E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then the data
recovery module recovers the clock signal. Then, the clock signal and E4/STM-1
electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module.
The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received E4/STM-1
electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and sends them to the overhead
processing module.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received
E4/STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes them into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4
signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit is multiplexed into
E4/STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame
synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes.
for the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface unit
after scrambling.
The interface unit sends the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals into the cable for
transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
− communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.
− collects and reports alarms and performance events.
− process the configuration command from NM.
6-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Power module
6.1.4 Front Panel
Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SPQ4 and the MU04.
SPQ4 MU04
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
SPQ4 MU04
SPQ4 MU04
Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SEP1.
There are no indicators on the MU04 or TSB8.
2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the SPQ4, the SPQ4 should work with the MU04 to
input/output E4/STM-1 signals.
Table 6-2 describes interfaces on the MU04.
6-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04

Interface MU04
Access service 4 x E4/STM-1
Interface 75 ohm unbalanced interface
Interface type SMB

When used with the MU04 and TSB8, the SPQ4 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 4
x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. Table 6-3 lists the TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the
OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4
OptiX OSN 3500 Support two groups of The board in slot 2 protects the boards
(80 Gbit/s) 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection in slots 3, 4, and 5.
The board in slot 16 protects the boards
OptiX OSN 3500
(40 Gbit/s)
TPS protection slot 7.
slot 12.

REG

1500A
1500B TPS protection slot 13.
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the

protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated
network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
Figure 6-3 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SPQ4 is used with the MU04 and
TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
6-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
4× E4/STM-1 4× E4/STM-1 4× E4/STM-1
Switch
control
TSB8 MU04 MU04 MU04 signal
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cross-
connect
and timing
board
Slot 9/10
SPQ4 SPQ4 SPQ4 SPQ4
Fail
Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the
SPQ4 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the MU04.
Switching status
When a working SPQ4 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the
following manners.
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8
does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the
6-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1920212223242526 27 28 2930313233343536 37
TSB8
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
TSB8
AUX
PIU
PIU
FAN FAN FAN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213141516 1718
Protection 1
Protection 2
Working 1
Working 1
Working 1
Working 2
Working 2
Working 2
SCC
XCS
XCS
Fiber routing
Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In Figure 6-4, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board
in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15.
The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Protection SPQ4 Slot 2 Slot 16
Working SPQ4 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15
EU04 Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the
6-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Protection 1
Protection 2
Working 1
Working 2
CXL16
CXL16
SAP
Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500
In Figure 6-5, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13
protects the one in slot 12.
Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Protection SPQ4 Slot 6 Slot 13
TSB8 Slot 1 Slot 17
Working SPQ4 Slot 7 Slot 12
MU04 Slot 3 Slot 15

When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation
between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-6.
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16 EU08
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17

Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
6-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Protection SPQ4 Slot 12
TSB8 Slot 14
Working SPQ4 Slot 13
MU04 Slot 16

The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SPQ4.
J1
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frames and the
Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4
Service type C2 setting
E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

The SPQ4 has version N1 and version N2. The two versions are different in the
internal modules used, but realize functions in the same way. The two versions can be
used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The two
versions can be replaced by each other in products of version V100R003.
The version of the MU04 and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The
boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 6-8 lists the technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04.
6-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04

SPQ4 MU04
Bit rate 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Process Process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) Access 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals

capability signals
Line code pattern CMI
Connector None SMB
Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
H
D
W
Weight (kg) 0.91 0.41
Power 24 2
consumption (W)

condition

condition


6-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S
The PL3 is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board.
The PD3 is a 6 x E3/DS3 processing board.
The PL3A is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board with cables led out from the front
panel.
The C34S is a 3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.
The D34S is a 6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.
The PL3/PD3 works with the D34S to access and process 3/6 x E3 electrical signals.
The PL3 works with the C34S to access and process 3 x E3 electrical signals .The
PL3/PD3 and C34S/D34S work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection.
Table 6-9 lists the slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 on the OptiX
OSN products.
Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8
Product PL3/PD3 PL3A C34S D34S TSB8
OptiX OSN Slots 2–5, Slots 1–8, Slots 19, 21, Slots 19, 21, Slots 19,
3500 (80 13–16 11–17 23, 25, 29, 23, 25, 29, 35
Gbit/s) 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN Slots 2–5, Slots 1–8, Slots 19, 21, Slots 19, 21, Slots 19,
3500 (40 13–16 11–16 23, 25, 29, 23, 25, 29, 35
Gbit/s) 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN Slots 6–7, Slots 5–8, Slots 1, 3, 15, Slots 1, 3, 15, Slots 1,
2500 12–13 11–13 17 17 17
OptiX OSN Not available Not available Not available Not available Not
2500 REG available
OptiX OSN Not available Slots 12–13 Not available Not available Not
1500A available
OptiX OSN Slots 12–13 Slots 11–13 Slots 14, 16 Slots 14, 16 Slot 14
1500B
6.2.1 Functionality
Functionality PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S TSB8
Basic function 3 x E3 6 x E3 3 x E3 3x 6x 8-chann

processin processin processin E3/DS3 E3/DS3 el
g board g board g board PDH PDH electrical
(led out interface interface interface
from front switching switching switching
panel) board board &
bridging
board
Service Access and process E3/DS3 signals.

processing
6-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Overhead Support the setting and querying of all path overheads at VC-3 level.
processing
events
Protection The PL3/PD3 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards
schemes and switching & bridging boards.
Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces.

Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level and locate faults quickly.
Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset does not affect services.
6.2.2 Principle
Figure 6-7 shows the functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A (one
channel of E3/DS3 signal is processed).
Backplane
E3/DS3
D34S/D34S Cross-connect unit
Decoder Mapping
Interface
module
E3/DS3 De-
D34S/D34S Encoder
mapping Cross-connect unit
Logic
control SCC
module
+3.3 V （Standby）
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V module -48 V
+3.3 V
Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A
The E3/DS3 signal is accessed, through the interface module, into the decoder, where
6-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
NRZ data signal and clock signal are recovered after decoding. Then, the signal is
sent to the mapping module.
In the mapping module, the E3/DS3 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-3, and
formed as VC-3 after path overhead processing, as TU-3 after pointer processing, and
finally as VC-4 after multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit.
Figure 6-8 shows the mapping process.
x3
VC-4 TUG-3 TU-3
VC-3
C-3
44736 kbit/s
or
34368 kbit/s
Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signals from the VC-4 signal
from the cross-connect unit, and then sends them to the encoder, where E3 or DS3
signals are output.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
− Enables the communication between the boards and the SCC.
− Collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.
− Processes the configuration command from the SCC.
Power module
6.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-9 shows the front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S.
6-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
PL3 PD3 PL3A D34S

STAT STAT STAT
ACT ACT ACT
PROG PROG PROG
SRV SRV SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3
PL3 PD3 PL3A D34S
PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S
Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
6-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PL3, PD3, and PL3A.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colours (red, green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colours (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – triple colours (red, green, and yellow)
There are no indicators on the C34S, D34S or TSB8.
2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PL3 or PD3. The board should work with the D34S to
input or output E3/DS3 signals.
There are three pairs of 75-ohm SMB unbalanced interfaces on the front panel of the
PL3A.
Table 6-10 describes interfaces on the D34S.
Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S
Interface C34S D34S
Access service 3 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3
Interface 75 ohm unbalanced interface
Interface type SMB
Corresponding processing board PL3, PD3

The PL3/PD3 works with the C34S/D34S and TSB8 to achieve 1:N protection for 3/6 x
E3/DS3 signals. Table 6-11 lists the TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN
products.
Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3
OptiX OSN 3500 Support two groups of The board in slot 2 protects the boards
(80 Gbit/s) 1:N (N≤3) TPS in slots 3, 4, and 5.
protection. The board in slot 16 protects the boards
OptiX OSN 3500
(40 Gbit/s)
TPS protection. slot 7.
slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500 Not supported. —

REG
OptiX OSN Not supported. —
6-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1500A
1500B TPS protection. slot 13.
As equipment-level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board
upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections
effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
The protection principle of the PL3 is the same as that of the PD3. Figure 6-10 shows
the principle of 1:3 TPS for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
6 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3
Switch
control
TSB8 D34S D34S D34S signal
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cross-
connect
unit
SLOT 9/10

PD3 PD3 PD3 PD3
Fail
Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Normal status
When each working board works normally, the service signal is accessed to the
corresponding PD3 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S.
Switching status
When a working PD3 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected in
the following manners.
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S
switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the
TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the
TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.
switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not
act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

Table 6-12 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when
the equipment is configured as 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3.
Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500
Working board Protection board Slot configuration
PL3 (E3) PL3 (E3) As shown in Figure 6-11.
PL3 (DS3) PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3) PD3 (DS3)
6-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1920212223242526 27 28 2930313233343536 37
TSB8
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
TSB8
AUX
PIU
PIU
FAN FAN FAN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213141516 1718
Protection 1
Protection 2
Working 1
Working 1
Working 1
Working 2
Working 2
Working 2
SCC
XCS
XCS
Fiber routing
Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In the figure, slot 2 protects slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 protects slots 13, 14, and 15.
Table 6-13 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8.
Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
PL3/PD3 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16
PL3/PD3 (working board) Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15
D34S Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

PL3 (DS3) PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3) PD3 (DS3)
6-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Protection 1
Protection 2
Working 1
Working 2
CXL16
CXL16
SAP
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500
In the figure, slot 6 protects slot7, and slot 13 protects slots 12.
Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
PL3/PD3 (protection board) Slot 6 Slot 13
PL3/PD3 (working board) Slot 7 Slot 12
TSB8 Slot 1 Slot 17
D34S Slot 3 Slot 15

Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B
PL3 (DS3) PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3) PD3 (DS3)
6-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16 EU08
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17

Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the figure, slot 12 protects slot 13.

Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN
1500B
PL3/PD3 (protection board) Slot 12
PL3/PD3 (working board) Slot 13
TSB8 Slot 14
D34S Slot 16

The following parameters should be set on the T2000 for the PL3/PD3.
Load indication
When the service channel does not process the services it carries, select “Do not
load”. Otherwise, select “Load”.
Tributary loopback
The tributary loopback function is generally used to locate faults for each service
channel.
The tributary loopback is a diagnosis function, which may interrupt services on
relevant channels.
Channel service type
E3 or DS3 can be selected on the T2000 according to the input service type.
Version N1 is the only version for the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8. The
boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and
OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 6-18 lists the technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, and D34S.
6-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S
Bit rate 34368 kbit/s or 44736 kbit/s
Processing capability 3x 6x 3x None None

E3/DS3 E3/DS3 E3/DS3
Access capability 0 0 3x 3x 6x
E3/DS3 E3/DS3 E3/DS3
Line code pattern E3:HDB3, DS3:B3ZS
Connector None None SMB SMB
Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 262.05 262.05
H (H) x 110 (H) x 110
D (D) x 22 (D) x 22
W (W) (W)
Weight (kg) 1.00 1.12 1.00 0.31 0.38
Power consumption (W) 15 19 15 2 2

condition Humidity: 10%–90%


Humidity: 10%–100%

6-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B
The PQ1 is a 63 x E1 processing board.
The PQM is a 63 x E1/T1 processing board.
The D75S is a 32 x 75 ohm E1 PDH interface switching board.
The D12S is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface switching board.
The D12B is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface board.
Table 6-19 lists slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B in the OptiX OSN
products.
Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Product PQ1/PQM D75S/D12S/D12B
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–7,12–13 Slots 1–4,15–18
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not available Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A Not available Not available
Table 6-20 shows the difference between the PQ1 and PQM.
Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM
Board PQ1 PQM
Comparison
Processing capability 63 x E1 63 x E1/T1
Interface board (providing 2 x D75S or 2 x D12S 2 x D12S

TPS)
Interface board (NOT 2 x D12B, 2 x D75S or 2 2 x D12B or 2 x D12S

providing TPS) x D12S
6.3.1 Functionality
Functionality PQ1 PQM D75S/D12S/D12B
Basic function 63 x E1 processing 63 x E1/T1 E1/T1 interface board
board processing board Refer to Table 6-21 for
details.
Service When working with interface boards, the PQ1 can access and process
processing 63 x E1 signals.
When working with interface boards, the PQM can access and process
63 x E1/T1 signals.
6-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Functionality PQ1 PQM D75S/D12S/D12B

Overhead Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission
processing and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.
events
Protection The PQ1/PQM supports TPS protection when working with interface
schemes boards and switching & bridging boards.
Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with
switching time less than 50ms.

6.3.2 Principle
Figure 6-14 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM (one channel of
E1/T1 signal is processed).
Backplane
D75S/D12S/ E1/T1
Cross-connect unit
D12B Decoder Mapping
Interface
module
E1/T1 De-
D75S/D12S/ Encoder
mapping Cross-connect unit
D12B
Logic
control SCC
module
+3.3 V（Standby）
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM
6-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
The input E3/DS3 signal enters, through the interface module, the decoder, where
HDB3 or B8ZS data signal and clock signal are recovered. Then, the signal is sent to
the mapping module.
In the mapping module, the E1/T1 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-12, and
formed as VC-12 after channel overhead processing, as TU-12 after pointer
processing, and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the
cross-connect unit. The mapping process is shown in Figure 6-15.
x3 x7 x3
VC-4 TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-12
VC-12
2048 kbit/s
C-12
12 or
1544 kbit/s
Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal
from the cross-connect unit, and sends the signal to the encoder, where E1 or T1
signals are output.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
− communicates the board with the SCC.
− collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.
− process the configuration command from the SCC.
Power module
6.3.3 Front Panel
Figure 6-16 shows the front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B.
6-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
PQ1 PQM D75S D12S D12B

STAT STAT
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
1～8
1～8
1～8
9～16
9～16
9～16
17～24
17～24
17～24
25～32
25～32
25～32

Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PQ1 and PQM.
There are no indicators on the D75S, D12S, or D12B.
2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PQ1 or PQM. The board should work with the D75S,
D12S, or D12B to input/output E1/T1 signals.
Table 6-21 shows the difference between the D75S, D12S, and D12B.
Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B
Board D75S D12S D12B
Comparison
Access capability 32 x E1 32 x E1/T1 32 x E1/T1
6-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board D75S D12S D12B

Comparison
Interface 75 ohm 120 ohm 120 ohm balanced
unbalanced balanced interface
interface interface
Interface type DB44 DB44 DB44

The PQ1 and PQM work with the D75S or D12S to achieve 1:N TPS protection for 63
x E1/T1 signals. Table 6-22 shows the TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM in the
OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM
OptiX OSN 3500 Support one group of 1:N The board in slot 1 protects the ones in
(80 Gbit/s) (N≤8) TPS protection slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Support one group of 1:N The board in slot 5 protects the ones in
(N≤4) TPS protection slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.

REG

1500A
OptiX OSN Support one group of 1:N The board in slot 11 protects the ones
1500B (N≤2) TPS protection in slots 12 and 13.
The protection principle of the PQ1 is the same with that of the PQM. Figure 6-17
shows the protection principle of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
6-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
E1 protection bus
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
E1
service bus
S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6
Fail
Protection Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working

PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1
Detect board fault
Cross-connect and timing board TPS switching

control bus
Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
When detecting a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect board delivers the service
switching command to control the interface board to switch the faulty board to
protection board, thus achieving the protection of services.

When the equipment is configured as with 1:8 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation
between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-23.
PQ1 (75 ohm) PQ1 (75 ohm) The board in slot 1 is a protection
board, protecting the boards in
PQ1 (120 ohm) PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
PQM PQM Figure 6-18 shows the slots for the
working and the protection boards.
6-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1920212223242526 27 28 2930313233343536 37
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
AUX
PIU
PIU
FAN FAN FAN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213141516 1718
Protection
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
SCC
XCS
XCS
Fiber routing
Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500

between the working and the protection board is shown in Table 6-24.
Working board Protection board Slot
PQ1 (75 ohm) PQ1 (75 ohm) The board in slot 5 is a protection
board, protecting the boards in
PQ1 (120 ohm) PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.
PQM PQM Figure 6-19 shows the slots for the
working and the protection boards.
6-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Protection
Working
Working
Working
Working
CXL16
CXL16
SAP
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 6-19 Slot assignment upon 1:4 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500

between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-25.
Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
PQ1/PQM (protection) Slot 11
PQ1/PQM (working) Slots 12, 13
D75S/D12S Slots 14, 15, 16, 17

The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PQ1 or PQM.
J2
It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access
point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the
transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.
Version N1 is the only version of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. The boards
can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 6-26 lists the technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B.
Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Bit rate 2048 1544 kbit/s or 2048 kbit/s
kbit/s
6-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Processing 63 x E1 63 x Support Support Not support
capability E1/T1 TPS TPS TPS
Accessing 0 0 32 x E1 32 x 32 x E1/T1
capability E1/T1
Line code pattern E1: HDB3, T1: B8ZS, AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
Connector None None DB44 DB44 DB44
Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x H

25.4 (W) D
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01 0.35 0.35 0.31
Power 19 22 5.5 9 1
consumption (W)

operating condition Humidity: 10%–90%



6-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S
The PD1 is a 32 x E1 half-slot processing board. It is used with the L75S or L12S in
the OptiX OSN 1500A and used with D75S or D12S in the OptiX OSN 2500 and
1500B.
The PL1A is a 16 x E1(75-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out
from the front panel.
The PL1B is a 16 x E1 (120-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out
from the front panel.
The L75S is a 16 x E1 interface switching board (75-ohm). It is only used in the
OptiX OSN 1500A.
The L12S is a 16 x E1/T1 interface switching board (120-ohm). It is only used in the
OptiX OSN 1500A.
Note:
When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PL1A and PL1B are called PL1
hereinafter.
Table 6-27 lists slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
Product PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S
(80Gbit/s)

(40Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–7, 19–21 Not available Not available

REG
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 2, 12 (after slot Slots 6–9 Slots 6–7
segmentation)
OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 1–3, 6–8, 11–13 Slots 6–9 Not available
(after slot
segmentation)
6.4.1 Functionality
Functionality PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S
Basic function 32 x E1 processing 16 x E1 processing E1/T1 interface
board board board
6-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Functionality PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S

Service processing When working with interface boards, the PD1 can access and
process 32 x E1 signals. The PL1 accesses and processes 16 x E1
signals directly.
Overhead Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent

processing transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.
events
Protection The PD1 supports TPS protection when working with interface
schemes switching boards.
Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection,
with switching time less than 50ms.

Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to
services.
6.4.2 Principle
The working principle of the PD1 and PL1 is the same as that of the PQ1. Refer to
section 6.3.2 “Principle” for details.
6.4.3 Front Panel
Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.
PD1 PL1 L12S L75S

STAT STAT
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
1-16
1-16
1-16
PD1 PL1 L12S L75S

Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S
6-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PD1 and PL1.
There are no indicators on the L75S and L12S.
2. Interfaces
In the OptiX OSN 1500A, the PD1 works with the L75S or L12S to input/output E1
signals. In the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500B, the PD1 working with the
D75S or D12S to input/output E1 signals. Refer to section 6.3.3 for details on the
D75S and D12S.
Table 6-28 compares the PL1, L75S, and L12S.
Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S
Board L75S L12S PL1
Comparison
Access capability 16 x E1 16 x E1 16 x E1
Interface 75 ohm 120 ohm 75/120 ohm

unbalanced balanced unbalanced/balance
interface interface d interface
Interface type 2mmHM 2mmHM 2mmHM

The PD1 and PL1 can only be used in the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The
PD1 works with L75S/D75S or L12S/D12S to achieve 1:N protection to E1 signals.
Table 6-29 shows the TPS protection of the PD1.
Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1
(80 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Support two groups of The board in slot 5 protects the ones in
1:N (N≤2) TPS protection slots 6 and 7.
The board in slot 19 protects the ones
in slots 20 and 21.

REG
6-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

1500A TPS protection slot 12.
OptiX OSN Support two groups of The board in slot 1 protects the ones in
1500B 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection slots 2 and 3.
at most The board in slot 11 protects the ones
in slots 12 and 13.
The board in slot 6 protects the ones in
slots 7 and 8.
The latter two groups in the above
groups cannot coexist.
The TPS protection principle of the PD1 is the same as that of the PQ1.

The 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 2500
performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-21 shows the board distribution.
1 2 3 4 19 20 21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
P2 W2 W2
S S S
L L L
CXL16
CXL16
O O O
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
SAP
T T T
5 6 7
P1 W1 W1
Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Table 6-30 lists slots for the working, protection, and interface switching board of the
PD1.
Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN
2500
PD1 (protection) Slots 5 Slot 19
PD1 (working) Slots 6, 7 Slots 20, 21
D75S/D12S Slots 2, 4 Slots 1, 3
6-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 1500A
performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-22 shows the board distribution.
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6 L75S(17~32)
Slot 20 PD1(P) Slot 2 Slot 12 PD1(W) Slot 7 L75S(1~16)

Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1

Table 6-31 shows the slot assignment of the working and the protection board of the
PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation
PD1 Slot 11 Slot 6 Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6
(protection)
PD1 (working) Slots 12, 13 Slots 7, 8 Slots 2, 3 Slots 12, 13 Slots 7, 8
D75S/D12S Slots 15, 17 Slots 15, 17 Slots 14, 16 Slots 15, 17 Slots 15, 17
Note: The protection group with slot 6 and that with slot 11 cannot coexist, because the two
groups share protection bus. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports one group of TPS protection to
E1 signals before slot segmentation, and supports two groups after slot segmentation.

The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PD1 or PL1.
J2
It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access
point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the
transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.
Version N1 is the only version of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. The boards can be
used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot
segmentation.
The PL1 has PL1A and PL1B. A indicates the interface impedance is 75 ohm, and B
indicates the interface impedance is 120 ohm.
Table 6-32 lists the technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.
6-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
PD1 PL1 L75S L12S
Bit rate 2048 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s
Processing 32 x E1 16 x E1 TPS TPS

capability
Accessing 0 0 16 x E1 16 x E1
capability (75-ohm) (120-ohm)
Line code E1: HDB3

pattern
Connector None 2mmHM 2mmHM 2mmHM
Dimensions H
(mm) D
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 0.50 0.45 0.24 0.27
Power 15 6.7 2.7 4.5

consumption
(W)

condition

condition


6-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 7 Data Processing Boards
7 Data Processing Boards
This chapter introduces data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, including Ethernet data processing boards, ATM data
processing boards and Ethernet data interface boards as follows.
Ethernet transparent transmission board – EFT4/EFT8/EGT2
Ethernet switching processing board – EFS4/EFS0/EGS2
Ethernet board with RPR function – EMR0/EGR2
ATM service processing board – ADL4/ADQ1
ATM service processing board with IMA function – IDL4/IDQ1
Multi-service transparent transmission processing board – MST4
Ethernet data interface board – EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
Refer to Table 4-3 for the name and descriptions of the data processing boards
supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.
7-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
The EGT2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board.
The EFT8 is an 8/16-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board.
The EFT4 (seated in the half-height slot) is a 4-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet
transparent transmission board.
The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.
The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.
Table 7-1 shows the slots for the EGT2, EFT8, EFT4, EFF8, and ETF8 boards.
Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
EFT8 EFT8
(led out from (used with
Product EGT2 (Note 1) EFT4 EFF8/ETF8
front panel) interface
(Note 1) boards) (Note 1)
OptiX OSN Slots 19, 21,
Slots 1–8, Slots 1–6, Slots 2–5,
3500 (80 Not supported 23, 25, 29,
11–16 13–16 13–16
Gbit/s) 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN Slots 19, 21,

Slots 1–8, Slots 1–6,
3500 (40 Slots 13 Not supported 23, 25, 29,
11–16 13–16
Gbit/s) 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN Slots 5–8, Slots 5–8, Slots 5–7, Slots 1, 3,

Slots 7, 12–13
2500 11–13 11–13 19–212 15, 17
OptiX OSN Not

Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
2500 REG supported
Slots 2–3,
OptiX OSN Not
Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13 Not supported slots 12–13,
1500A supported
slots 6–92
Slots 1–3,
OptiX OSN
Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13 Slots 12–13 slots 11–13, Slots 14, 16
1500B
slots 6–92
Note 1: The EGT2 and the EFT8 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically
according to the capacity of the slots they are seated in.
Note 2: These slots are half-height slots.
7-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
7.1.1 Functionality
Board
EGT2 EFT8 EFT4
Function
Transparent Transparent Transparent
Basic function transmission of 2 GE transmission of 8/16 FE transmission of 4 FE
signals signals signals
The EFT8 can access 8

electrical Ethernet
signals itself.
Used with the ETF8,
the EFT8 can access
Used with an 16 electrical Ethernet
- -
interface board signals.
Used with the EFF8,
the EFT8 can access 8
optical Ethernet signals
and 8 electrical
Ethernet signals.
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
Ethernet optical
interface, supporting
auto-negotiation function
and compliant with
Used with the ETF8,
IEEE802.3z.
the EFT8 supports
Adopt hot-swappable 10Base-T/100Base-TX. Support
Interface SFP optical interface to 10Base-T/100Base-TX,
specifications Used with EFF8 to and comply with
support a transmission
support 100Base-FX, IEEE802.3u.
distance of 550 m for
compliant with
multimode fiber and 10
IEEE802.3u.
km for single-mode fiber
(or use 40 km and 70 km
optical modules
according to the actual
condition).
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, supporting 64-byte–9600-byte frames and 9600-byte

Service frame format
Jumbo frame.
1.25 Gbit/s;
Maximum uplink Access up to 24 VC-3s
2.5 Gbit/s or 126 VC-12s + 18 622 Mbit/s
bandwidth
VC-3s or 63 VC-12s +
21 VC-3s
Number of
2 16 4
VCTRUNKs
High level data link control (HDLC)

Encapsulation format Link access procedure-SDH (LAPS)
Generic Framing Procedure-Frame Mapped (GFP-F)
7-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board
EGT2 EFT8 EFT4
Function
VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv
VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv,
Mapping mode (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X
and VC-4-Xv
≤3) ≤3)
CAR Not supported Not supported Not supported
GE port based IEEE FE port based IEEE FE port based IEEE

Flow control 802.3X complaint flow 802.3X complaint flow 802.3X complaint flow
control control control
Link capacity
ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and
adjustment scheme
bandwidth protection.
(LCAS)
Link stat pass

Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.
through (LPT)
Testing frame Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
Ethernet
performance Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.
monitoring
Alarm and Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment
performance management and maintenance.
7.1.2 Principle
The working principle of the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4 is the same, except that GE signal
or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-1 takes a GE signal as an example to
introduce the working principle of the EGT2.
7-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Backplane
1000 M Service
Interface Encapsulation Mapping Cross-
processing connect
module module module
module unit
1000 M
Control and
communication SCC unit
module
+3.3 V (standby)
+1.5 V
+1.8 V Power
-48 V
+2.5 V module
+3.3 V
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2
The interface module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet
equipment (such as LAN switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel
conversion to the signals. Then it sends signals to the service processing module for
frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC)
termination and Ethernet performance statistics. At the encapsulation module, HDLC,
LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation is done to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services
are mapped into VC-3 or VC-4 at the mapping module and then sent to the
cross-connect unit.
Demap the VC-3 or VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the
encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines
the route according to the level of the equipment; it also provides frame delimitation,
adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics. Finally, the
interface module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the signals and
then sends them out from the Ethernet interface.
3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.
Power module
Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.
7.1.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 is shown in Figure 7-2.
7-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
EGT2 EFT8 ETF8 EFF8

STAT
ACT 1
PROG STAT 2
SRV ACT 3
PROG 4
LINK1 SRV
ACT1 5
LINK2 6
ACT2 7
8
LINK ACT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
FE1
OUT1
FE2
IN1
FE3
FE1
OUT2
FE4
FE2
IN2
FE3
FE5 EFT4
FE4
STAT
FE6 ACT
PROG
SRV
FE7
FE5
FE8
FE6
FE1
FE7
FE2
FE8
FE3
FE4
EGT2 EFT8 ETF8 EFF8
EGT2 EFT8 ETF8 EFF8 EFT4

Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4.
Except the above common indicators, the EGT2 has other four indicators to show port
connection status. Table 7-2 shows the indicators description.
7-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2

Connection GE port 1 connects with remote equipment

On
indicator–LINK1 successfully
(green) Off GE port 1 fails to connects with remote equipment
Data GE port 1 and remote equipment are

Flashing
receiving/sending receiving/sending data
indicator–ACT1
GE port 1 and remote equipment do not
(orange) Off
receive/send data

On
indicator–LINK2 successfully
(green) Off GE port 2 fails to connects with remote equipment

Flashing
receiving/sending receiving/sending data
indicator–ACT2
(orange) Off
receive/send data
Each Ethernet port of the EFT8, EFT4 and ETF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators
near the port. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those in Table 7-2.
Each Ethernet port on the front panel of the EFF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators.
Table 7-3 shows the indicator description.
Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8
Connection indicator–LINK On Fiber-port connection succeeded.

(green) Off Fiber-port connection failed
Data receiving/sending Flashing Receiving/Sending data

indicator–ACT (orange) Off No data received/sent
2. Interfaces
Table 7-4 shows the interface description of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8.
Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Board
EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 EFF8 ETF8
Item
Number of
2 pairs 8 4 8 8
interfaces
Interface Interface
Access capacity 2 x GE 8 x FE 4 x FE
board board
Connector LC RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45
7-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board
EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 EFF8 ETF8
Item
Swappable optical Not Not Not Not
Supported
module supported supported supported supported

The parameters required by the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 are as follows:
J1
It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point
Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the
intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the
corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to
“HuaWei SBS” by default.
C2
It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If
mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm
and insert all “1”s into the C4.
Ethernet interface setting
Table 7-5 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface of the
EGT2/EFT8/EFT4.
Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4
Working mode The EGT2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex.
The EFT8/EFT4 can be set to auto-negotiation or 10/100 Mbit/s
half-duplex or 10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex.
Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work
under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be
lost or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely
interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
LCAS enable Enable LCAS or not.
Maximum packet Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
length
Mapping protocol Available protocols: HDLC, LAPS and GFP-F. It is preferable to

select the default – GFP-F.

The EGT2 and EFT8 have N1 version only. The EGT2 and EFT8 are applicable to the
OptiX the OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
The EFT4, seated in the half-height slot, has R1 version only. The EFT4 is applicable
to the OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
The EFF8 and ETF8 interface boards have N1 version only. The EFF8 and ETF8 are
7-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (B).
The technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 are shown in Table
7-6.
Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Description
Parameter
EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 ETF8/EFF8
Bit rate 1000 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s
8 x FE E/O
Processing
2 x GE 16 x FE 4 x FE interface
capacity
board
Line code
NRZ Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)
pattern
E: RJ-45
Connector LC (SFP) RJ-45 RJ-45
O: LC
Interface IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3u

specifications compliant compliant compliant compliant
262.05 (H) x 262.05 (H) x 262.05 (H) x

Dimensions 111.8 (H) x 220
220 (D) x 25.4 220 (D) x 25.4 110 (D) x 22
(mm) (D) x 25.4 (W)
(W) (W) (W)
EFT8: 0.37
Weight (kg) 0.9 1.01 0.53
EFF8: 0.44
Power EFT8: 2
consumption 23 26 14
(W) EFF8: 6
Optical module 1000Bas 1000Bas 1000Bas 1000Bas 100Base- 100Ba

type e-SX e-LX e-ZX e-ZX FX se-FX
Central
1270–13 1480–15 1270–13 1261–1
wavelength 850 1310
55 80 80 360
(nm)
Transmission
0–0.55 0–10 40 70 2 15
distance (km)
Mean launched –11.5 to –19 to –15 to

–9.5 to –4 –2 to –5 –23
power (dBm) –3 –14 –8
Optical receiver
–17 –19 –4 to –2 –22 –30 –32
sensitivity (dBm)

operating
7-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Description
Parameter
EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 ETF8/EFF8
operating


Note: The EFT8 has no optical interface. The 100 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EFF8.
The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGT2.
7-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8
The EGS2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet processing board with L2 switching.
The EFS4 is a 4-port FE processing board with L2 switching.
The EFS0 is a FE processing board with L2 switching.
The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.
The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.
The ETS8 is an 8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board.
The Ethernet switching boards are responsible for transparent transmission,
convergence and Layer 2 switching of GE/FE services.
Table 7-7 shows the slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 in OptiX OSN
products.
Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
OptiX OSN EGS2 EFS4 EFS0
ETS8 EFF8/ETF8
product (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Slots 19, 21,
OptiX OSN 3500 Slots 1–8, Slots 1–8, Slots 2–5,
Slots 21, 33 23, 25, 29,
(80 Gbit/s) 11–16 11–16 13–16
31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 21,

OptiX OSN 3500 Slots 1–8, Slots 1–8, Slots 2–5,
Slots 21, 33 23, 25, 29,
(40 Gbit/s) 11–16 11–16 13–16
31, 33, 35
Slots 5–8, Slots 5–8, Slots 6–7, Slots 1, 3, Slots 1, 3,

OptiX OSN 2500
11–13 11–13 12–13 15, 17 15, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 Not Not Not Not Not

REG supported supported supported supported supported
Not Not Not

supported supported supported
OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 14 Slots 14, 16
Note 1: The EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 supports bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically
according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.
7-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
7.2.1 Functionality
Board EFS4 EFS0 EGS2 (Note 1)
Function
Basic function Access and Process 8 FE signals Access and process 2
process 4 FE GE signals
signals
Used with an - Used with ETF8, the -

interface board EFS0 can access 8
electrical FE signals;
Used with EFF8, the
EFS0 can access 8
optical FE signals;
Used with ETS8, the
EFS0 can provide
TPS protection for 8
electrical FE signals
Interface 10Base-T/100Bas Used with ETF8, the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX

specifications e-TX, compliant EFS0 supports Ethernet optical
with IEEE802.3u 10Base-T/100Base-T interface; supporting
X; auto-negotiation
Used with EFF8 to function and compliant
support 100Base-FX; with IEEE802.3z;
compliant with Adopt hot-swappable
IEEE802.3u SFP optical interface to
support a transmission
distance of 550 m for
multimode fiber and 10
km for single-mode fiber
(or use 40 km and 70 km
optical modules
condition).
Service frame Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte
format frame, supporting 9600Byte Jumbo frame.
Maximum uplink 622 Mbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s

bandwidth
Number of 24 24 48
VCTRUNKs
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, VC-4,
VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv
VC-3-Xv
Encapsulation GFP-F GFP-F GFP-F

format
Ethernet Private Support Port based transparent transmission and Port+VLAN based
Line (EPL) virtual private line service.
7-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function
Ethernet Virtual Support EVPL, with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3,
Private Line (EVPL) IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol Label Switch (MPLS) MartiniOE.
Support port or port+ VLAN based MPLS encapsulation and forward.
Ethernet Private Support Layer 2 based convergence and point-to-multipoint

LAN (EPLAN) convergence;
Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side
switching;
Support self-learning of source medium access control (MAC) address.
The MAC address table is 16 k and the MAC address aging time can be
set and queried through T2000; support configuration of static MAC
route;
Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation;
Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of
VBs is 32 and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB
Ethernet virtual Support EVPLAN, in MPLS Martini OE, MPLS MartiniOP and stack
private LAN VLAN frame encapsulation format.
(EVPLAN)
MPLS Supported Supported Supported
Virtual local area IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p

network (VLAN)
VLAN convergence 4000 VLANs 4000 VLANs 4000 VLANs
Rapid spanning tree Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant
protocol (RSTP) with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping Supported Supported Supported
CAR Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s.
Board protection Support 1+1 backup
Traffic classification Support port based or port+VLAN based traffic classification.
LCAS (Note 1) ITU-T G.7042, achieving dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and

bandwidth protection
LPT Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.
Flow control Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control
Testing frame Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
Loopback Support inloop at Ethernet port (PHY layer or MAC layer).

Support inloop and outloop at VC3 level.
Ethernet Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.

performance
monitoring
7-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function
Alarm and Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient
performance event equipment management and maintenance.
Note 1: N1EGS2 does not support LCAS function, N2EGS2 supports LCAS function.
7.2.2 Principle
The working principle of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 is the same, except that GE
signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-3 shows the functional block
diagram of the EGS2 (one GE signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
1000 M Cross-connect unit

Interface Service
Encapsula- Mapping
processing processing
tion module module
module module
1000 M Cross-connect unit
Control and
communication SCC
module
+3.3 V （Standby）
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2
The interface processing module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from
external Ethernet equipments (such as Ethernet switch and router) and performs
decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then, the signals are sent to
the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping,
cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In
addition, traffic classification is performed according to the service type and
configuration requirement (message formats MPLS, Layer 2 MPLS VPN and
Ethernet/VLAN are supported), and Tunnel and VC double labels are added
according to the service for mapping and transfer. At the encapsulation module, the
GFP-F encapsulation is performed to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are
mapped into VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 at the mapping module and then sent to the
cross-connect unit.
The VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit are demapped and sent
7-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module

determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic
classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame
delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics
are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signals are sent out from
the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at interface
processing module.
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
7.2.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 is shown in Figure 7-4.
EGS2 EFS0 EFS4 ETS8

STAT STAT STAT
ACT ACT ACT
PROG
PROG PROG
SRV
SRV SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
FE1
FE1
OUT2
FE2
IN2
FE3
FE2
FE4
FE5
FE3
FE6
FE7
FE4
FE8
EGS2 EFS0 EFS4 ETS8
EGS2 EFS0 EFS4 ETS8

Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
7-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.
Except the above common indicators, the EGS2 has other four indicators to show port
connection. Table 7-8 shows the description of the indicators on the EGS2.
Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2

On
indicator–LINK1 successfully.
(green) Off GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment.

Flashing
receiving/sending receiving/sending data.
indicator–ACT1
(orange) Off
receive/send data.

On

Flashing
indicator–ACT2
(orange) Off
receive/send data.
Each Ethernet port of the EFS4, EFS0 and ETS8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators.
The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGS2.
For indicator description of the interface board, see section 7.1.3.
2. Interfaces
Table 7-9 shows the interface description of EGS2, EFS4, EFS0, and ETS8.
Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
Board EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8
Item
Number of 2 pairs 4 pairs 0 8 pairs
interfaces
Processing 2 x GE 4 x FE 8 x FE Ethernet
capacity interface
switching board
Connector LC RJ-45 None RJ-45
7-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8

Item
Swappable optical Supported Not supported Not Not supported
module supported

The EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8 to implement 1:1 TPS protection for FE
electrical services. Table 7-10 shows the TPS protection of the EFS0.
Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0
OptiX OSN product TPS protection Configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Support two The board in slot 2 protects the board in
Gbit/s) groups of 1:1 TPS. slot 3.
The board in slot 16 protects the board in
OptiX OSN 3500 (40
slot 15.
Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500 Support one group The board in slot 13 protects the board in
of 1:1 TPS. slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported -
OptiX OSN 1500A Not supported -
OptiX OSN 1500B Support one group The board in slot 12 protects the board in
of 1:1 TPS. slot 13.

The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 3500
is shown in Figure 7-5.
7-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1920212223242526 27 28 2930313233343536 37
TSB8
ETS8
ETS8
TSB8
AUX
PIU
PIU
FAN FAN FAN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213141516 1718
Protection 1
Protection 2
Working 1
Working 2
SCC
XCS
XCS
Fiber routing
Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500
In Figure 7-5, slot 2 protects slot 3, and slot 16 protects slot 15.
The slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 is shown in Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
EFS0 (protect board) Slot 2 Slot 16
EFS0 (working board) Slot 3 Slot 15
ETS8 Slot 21 Slot 33

The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 2500
7-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
EFS0(W)
EFS0(P)
CXL16
CXL16
TSB8
ETS8
SAP
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot 13 protects slot 12. The ETS8 seated in slot 15 is used with the working EFS0
and the TSB8 seated in slot 17 is used with the protect EFS0.
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500 B

The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot 14 TSB8
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16 ETS8
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 12 EFS0 (P) Slot 7

Slot 3 Slot 13 EFS0 (W) Slot 8
Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500
Slot 12 protects slot 13. The ETS8 seated in slot 16 is used with the working EFS0
and the TSB8 seated in slot 14 is used with the protect EFS0.
The major parameters required by the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are as follows:
J1
C2
7-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 7-12 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2,
EFS4 and EFS0.
Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0
Tag flag Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG
flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
(1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets
with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag
flag.
(2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to
the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards
those with the Tag flag.
(3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets
regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets
without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.
VLAN ID VLAN ID of the port.
Working mode The EGS2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex.
The EFS4 and EFS0 can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s
half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s
full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment
should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the
packet may be lost and the bit rate may decrease, or the service may
be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
Port type There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal
port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of
the service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL and
EVPLAN services.
LCAS enable Enable LCAS or not.
Maximum packet Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
length
Mapping protocol It is preferable to select the default – GFP-F mapping protocol.

The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 have two versions: N1 and N2. N1 is the basic one. In
this version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version. The
functions and parameters of N2 version are listed in this section. Table 7-13 shows the
version description of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.
7-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards

Item Description
Similarity The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same.
In N1 version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2

version.
The N1EFSO and the N2EFSO boards are the same in hardware and are
different in software.
Difference
The hardware of the N1EGS2 is different from that of the N2EGS2.
The N1EGS2 board does not support LCAS, LPT, RSTP, IGMP
Snooping, MPLS (including QinQ), link aggregation (802.3ad), and port
rate query function.
NM support The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2.
V100R001 products only support N1 Ethernet processing boards. If N2

boards are inserted, the T2000 takes the board as N1 version by default
and uses the boards as N1 boards.
V100R002 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards.

When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing
boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the
boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and
Product
configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to
support
N2 software.

configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to
N2 software.
For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to
N2.
The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and

V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards
Replacement (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2
boards on the T2000).
When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to
N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During
the upgrade, services will be interrupted.
The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
The ETS8 has only one version. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500, and OptiX OSN1500B.
The technical parameters of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 are shown in Table 7-14.
7-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8
Bit rate 1000 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s
Access 2 x GE 4 x FE 0 8 x FE Ethernet
capacity interface
switching board
Processing 2 x GE 4 x FE 8 x FE 0
capacity
Line code NRZ Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)

pattern
Connector LC (SFP) RJ-45 None RJ-45
Interface - 100 ohm - 100 ohm

impedance
Interface IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3u compliant

specifications compliant
Optical 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 1000Base-ZX 1000Base-ZX

module type
Central 850 1310 1270–1355 1480–1580

wavelength
(nm)
Transmission 0–0.55 0–10 40 70

distance (km)
Mean –9.5 to –4 –11.5 to –3 –2 to 5 –23

launched
power (dBm)
Receiver –17 –19 –4 to 2 –22

sensitivity
(dBm)
Dimensions 262.05 (H) x 220 262.05 (H) x 220 262.05 (H) x 220 262.05 (H) x 110
(mm) (D) x 25.4 (W) (D) x 25.4 (W) (D) x 25.4 (W) (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg) 1.04 0.98 0.98 0.37
Power 40/43.2 30 35 2.5

consumption
(W)

condition

condition
7-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8
Environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
for storage Humidity: 10%–100%

for Humidity: 10%–100%
transportation
Note: The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGS2.
7-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
7.3 EMR0/EGR2
The EMR0 is a 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet board with RPR function.
The EGR2 is a 2-port GE processing board with RPR function.
The EMR0 and EGR2 are responsible for accessing and processing Ethernet signals,
and constructing resilient packet ring (RPR).
Table 7-15 shows the slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 in OptiX OSN products.
Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2
EMR0 (led out from EMR0 (used with
Product EGR2
front panel) interface board)
OptiX OSN 3500
Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 2–3, 13–16 Slots 1–8, 11–16
(80 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 3500

Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 2–3, 13–16 Slots 1–8, 11–16
(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500

Not supported Not supported Not supported
REG
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Not supported Slots 12–13

Note: The EMR0 and EGR2 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically
according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.
Note:
For the OptiX OSN 3500, if SDH cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the maximum
uplink bandwidth of slots 6–8 and slots 11–13 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 622
Mbit/s. If the SDH cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth
of slots 5–8 and slots 11–14 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 1.25 Gbit/s.
For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 5–6 is 622 Mbit/s,
that of slots 7, 8, 11, 12 is 2.5 Gbit/s, and that of slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
7.3.1 Functionality
Board EMR0 EGR2
Function
Basic function Process 12 FE signals and 1 GE Access and process 2 GE
signals. signals.
Support RPR. Support RPR.
7-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board EMR0 EGR2

Function
Used with interface Provide 4 FE ports and 1 GE port. -
board Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 can
access 12 electrical FE signals.
Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 can
access 8 optical FE signals.
Interface Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX

specifications supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet optical interface,
over a transmission distance of up to supporting
100 m. auto-negotiation and
Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 compliant with
supports 100Base-FX. IEEE802.3z.
Comply with IEEE802.3u. Adopt hot-swappable SFP

optical interface to support
a transmission distance of
550 m for multimode fiber
and 10 km for single-mode
fiber (or use 40 km and 70
km optical modules
condition).
Service frame MPLS, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte frame and 9600Byte Jumbo

format frame
Maximum uplink 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s

bandwidth
Mapping mode VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-Xv (X≤8)
Encapsulation GFP-F: compliant with ITU-T G.7041

format LAPS: compliant with ITU-T X.86
Ethernet private line Support port-base transparent transmission and port+VLAN virtual
(EPL) private line service.
Ethernet virtual Support EVPL with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE
private line (EVPL) 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol label switch (MPLS)
Martini frame.
Support port-based or port+VLAN-based MPLS encapsulation and
forward;
Support five types of label switch path (LSP): ingress LSP, egress
LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP.
Support 2000 LSPs.
7-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board EMR0 EGR2

Function
Ethernet virtual Support EVPLAN service in stack VLAN or Martini frame
private LAN encapsulation format.
(EVPLAN) Support self-learning of MAC address. The MAC address table
has 64,000 entries k and the MAC address aging time can be set
and queried through T2000.
Support configuration of up to 4000 static MAC routes.
Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation.
Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum
number of VBs is 16 and that of logic ports is 32 for each VB.
MPLS Support MPLS frame format to construct EVPL and EVPLAN

services.
Support 4000 MPLS labels.
Virtual local area IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p

network (VLAN)
VLAN convergence Support 4000 VLANs. Support 4000 VLANs.
VLAN switching Support VLAN tag switching. Support VLAN tag

switching.
Port aggregation Support the aggregation of up to 12 -

FE ports.
RPR feature Supported and compliant with IEEE Supported and compliant
802.17. with IEEE 802.17.
RPR function Support up to 255 nodes and destination node stripping.

Support weighted fair algorithm.
Support fiver priority levels: A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR and C.
Provide auto discovery of topology to show the network status in
real time.
Support protection modes of steering, wrapping and wrapping +
steering. The signal fail time is less than 50ms.
Support configuring service route on RPRs manually.
Support self-learning function, that is, learning the
correspondence between MAC address and node number.
Rapid spanning tree Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP,
protocol (RSTP) compliant with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP snooping Supported
CAR Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64

kbit/s, ranging from 64 kbit/s to 100 Mbit/s.
2000 CARs are supported.
Traffic classification Support port-based ,port+VLAN and port + VLAN + PRI based
traffic classification.
7-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board EMR0 EGR2

Function
LCAS ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease
and bandwidth protection.
Flow control Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control.
Echo test frame Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.
Loopback Support inloop at Ethernet port (at PHY layer or MAC layer).
Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level.
Ethernet Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.

performance
monitoring
Alarm and Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient
performance event equipment management and maintenance.
7.3.2 Principle
The working principle of the EMR0 is the same as that of the EGR2, except that GE
signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-8 shows the functional block
diagram (one 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
10/100 Encapsu- Cross-connect

Mbit/s Ethernet RPR lation unit
Interface
processing processing and
module
module module mapping
10/100 Cross-connect
Mbit/s module
unit
Communication SCC
and control unit
module
+3.3 V (standby)
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0
The interface processing module accesses a 10/100Base-TX/100Base-FX signal
from external Ethernet equipment (such as the Ethernet switch and router) and
performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signal. Then, the signal is sent
to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping,
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In
7-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
addition, traffic classification, Layer 2 switching, convergence, MPLS frame

processing, RPR inner ring and outer ring mapping are performed according to
service type and configuration requirement. The RPR processing module performs
IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function. In the encapsulation module, LAPS
or GFP-F encapsulation of Ethernet frame is completed. Finally, the signal is mapped
into VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect
unit.
The VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is demapped and sent to
the encapsulation module for decapsulation. In the RPR processing module, IEEE
802.17 based ring network control function is performed. The service processing
module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs
traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also,
frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance
statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signal is sent
out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at the
interface processing module.
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
7.3.3 Front Panel
Figure 7-9 shows the front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2.
7-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
EMR0 EGR2
STAT STAT
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
LINK
LINK1
ACT
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
OUT1
IN1
IN1
FE1
OUT2
IN2
FE2
FE3
FE4
EMR0 EGR2
EMR0 EGR2
Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2
1. Indicators
The EGR2 has six board indicators and the EMR0 has eight board indicators as
follows:
Connection indicator (LINK1/2) – green
Data receiving/sending indicator (ACT1/2) – orange
The four indicators of the EGR2 indicating port connection are described in Table 7-16.
The LINK and ACT indicators on the EMR0 indicating GE optical interface connection
status, as described in Table 7-16.
7-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2


On

Flashing
indicator–ACT1
(orange) Off
receive/send data.

On

Flashing
indicator–ACT2
(orange) Off
receive/send data.
Each FE port on the front panel of the EMR0 also has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators.
The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGR2.
2. Interfaces
Table 7-17 shows the interface description of the EMR0 and EGR2.
Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2
Board
EMR0 EGR2
Item
1 pair of GE optical
2 pairs of GE optical
Number of interfaces interfaces + 4 FE electrical
interfaces
interfaces
GE: LC (SFP)
Connector GE: LC (SFP)
FE: R-J45
Swappable optical
Supported Supported
module

The parameters required by the EMR0 and EGR2 are as follows:
J1
7-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
C2
Table 7-18 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0
and EGR2.
Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2
Tag flag Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags
are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
(1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with
the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag.
(2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the
packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those
with the Tag flag.
(3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets
regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without
the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.
VLAN ID Set VLAN ID for external port only.
Working The GE interface can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s

mode full-duplex. The FE interface can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s
half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s
full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment
should work in the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may
be lost, or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely
interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
Port type There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port
of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the
service provider. Set the external port to PE and internal port to P.
Encapsulation Multiple encapsulation formats are available: MartinioE, CCCoE, stack

format VLAN, and MartinioP. This attribute takes effective for a P port. MartinioE
is applicable for point-to-multipoint Ethernet connection, MartinioP for
point-to-point Ethernet connection and stack VLAN for EVPLAN service.
Enable LCAS Enable LCAS or not
Maximum Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
packet length
Mapping LAPS and GFP-F are available. GFP-F is recommended.

protocol
7-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The EMR0 and EGR2 boards have N1 version and N2 version. N1 version is the basic
version. N2 version is the enhanced version, having some new functions compared
with N1 version. The functions and parameters listed in this section are applicable to
the boards of N2 version. Table 7-19 gives the version description of the two versions.
Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2
Item Description
Similarity The two versions are similar in the working principle and basic function.
N2 version provides some new functions besides all functions of N1
version.
Difference N1 version N2 version
– Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE

ports.
– Support the replacement of the VLAN

tag in Ethernet data.
Support EVPLAN services, Support EVPLAN services, using MPLS

using stack VLAN Martini encapsulation format.
encapsulation format.
Support the MAC address Support the MAC address with 64,000
with 16,000 entries. entries.
Support the creating, deleting Support the creating, deleting and

and query of VB. There can query of VB. There can be 16 VBs and
be 32 VBs and 16 logic ports 32 logic ports for each VB at most.
for each VB at most.
– Support configuring service routes on

RPR manually.
– Support the Echo function in RPR OAM

which tests the link status.
NM support The T2000 distinguish the boards of N1 version and that of N2 version
directly.
Product The V100R001 product only supports the RPR board of N1 version.
support
The V100R002 product supports the RPR board of N1 or N2 version.
The V100R003 product supports the Ethernet board of N1 or N2 version.
Replacement Boards of N1 version can only be used as boards of N1 version. To the

V100R002 or V100R003 product, boards of N2 version can replace the
ones of N1 version.
The EMR0 and the EGR2 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
7-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 7-20 shows the technical parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2. For the
parameters of GE and FE optical interface, refer to Table 7-14.
Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2
Board
EMR0 EGR2
Parameter
Bit rate 10/100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s 1000 Mbit/s
4 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x

1000 Mbit/s;
Access capacity 12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 2 x 1000 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s when used with
ETF8 or EFF8
12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x

Processing capacity 2 x 1000 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3

Line code pattern NRZ
(100 Mbit/s), NRZ
Connector RJ-45, LC (SFP) LC (SFP)
Interface impedance 100 ohm –
FE interface comply with

Interface specifications IEEE802.3u and GE interface IEEE802.3z compliant
comply with IEEE802.3z
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
(W)
Weight (kg) 1.20 1.10
Power consumption
50 54
(W)
Long-term operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Temperature: 0°C to 45°C

condition Humidity: 10%–90% Humidity: 10%–90%
Short-term operating Temperature: –5°C to 50°C Temperature: –5°C to 50°C

condition Humidity: 5%–95% Humidity: 5%–95%
Temperature: –40°C to
70°C
Temperature: –40°C to
70°C
7-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1
The ADL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board. The ADQ1 is a 4 x STM-1
ATM service processing board.
The ADL4 and ADQ1 are responsible for accessing and processing ATM service.
Table 7-21 shows the slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 in OptiX OSN products.
Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1
Product ADL4 ADQ1
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported Not supported
7.4.1 Functionality
Board ADL4 ADQ1
Function
Basic function Access and process 1 STM-4 Access and process 4 STM-1
ATM signal. ATM signal.
Optical Interface Support S-4.1, L-4.1. Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.
specifications
Connector Hot-swappable LC (SFP) Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
E3 ATM interface 12 × E3, inserted through 12 × E3, inserted through

PD3/PL3 PD3/PL3
Maximum uplink 8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4 8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

bandwidth
ATM switching 1.2 Gbit/s 1.2 Gbit/s

capacity
Mapping mode VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4) VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or

UBR
ATM connection 8000 8000
Statistics multiplexing Supported Supported
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514 IETF RFC2514
ATM multicast Spacial multicast, logic multicast Spacial multicast, logic

connection multicast
7-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board ADL4 ADQ1

Function
ATM protection Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 Unidirectional/bidirectional
(ITU-T I.630) and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring,
VC-Ring
Board protection Support 1+1 backup Support 1+1 backup
OAM function (ITU-T AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC AIS, RDI, LB, CC

I.610) (continuity check)
Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM
layer level for maintenance and fault localization.
Alarm and Provide abundant alarms and performance events for

performance maintenance and fault location.
7.4.2 Principle
Figure 7-10 shows the functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 (one
STM-1/STM-4 signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
Cross-connect
STM-1/STM-4 ATM
Physical unit
layer service Mapping
processing processing module
STM-1/STM-4 module module Cross-connect
unit
Control and
SCC
communication
module
+3.3 V(Standby)
+5 V
Power
-48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1
The STM-1/STM-4 signal accessed from the optical interface is sent to the physical
layer processing module after O/E conversion. After recovering data and clock, the
physical layer processing module performs SDH functions such as framing,
descrambling, overhead processing and pointer processing. In addition, it performs
the functions of ATM cell delimitation, descrambling and filtering. The ATM service
processing module establishes or disconnects connection for ATM service, and sends
ATM service to the mapping module after parameter configuration. The mapping
7-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
module maps ATM service to VC3, VC4 and VC4-Xv, and finally sends the service to
the cross-connect unit.
The VC-3 (E3), VC-4 or VC4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is sent to the
mapping module for demapping, and then to the ATM service processing module for
establishing or disconnecting connection as well as configuring parameters. The
uplink service is sent to the mapping module after being processed by the ATM
service processing module, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The downlink
service is directly sent to the physical layer processing module for service rate
matching, insertion of idle cell, and cell descrambling, and then for SDH mapping,
overhead insertion, multiplexing and scrambling. Finally, the signal is sent out after
E/O conversion.
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
7.4.3 Front Panel
Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1.l
7-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
ADL4 ADQ1
STAT STAT
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
CLASS 1 CLASS 1
LASER LASER
PRODUCT PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
ADL4 ADQ1
ADL4 ADQ1
Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the ADL4 and ADQ1.
2. Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The ADL4 has one pair and the ADQ1 has four pairs of
optical interfaces.
Optical interface type: LC
The ADL4 and ADQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
7-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The ADL4 and ADQ1 support 1+1 board level protection.
The 1+1 board level protection for the ADL4 and the ADQ1 requires the working and
protection ADL4/ADQ1 boards. The working and protection boards do not require
seating in paired slots.
The parameters required by the ADL4 and ADQ1 are as follows:
J1
C2
ATM interface setting
Table 7-22 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1.
Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1
Port type NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.
Traffic type Set according to the port.
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
Peak cell rate (PCR) Set the parameter for all types of services.
Sustainable cell rate Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
(SCR)
Maximum cell burst Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
size
Cell delay variation Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or
tolerance (CDVT) UBR.
7-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The ADL4 and ADQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN
3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
Table 7-23 shows the technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1.
Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1
ADL4 ADQ1
Access capacity 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
ATM processing 1.2 Gbit/s

capacity
Connector LC (SFP)
Dimensions (nm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 0.9 0.95
Power consumption 35 37
(W)
Optical module type S-4.1 L-4.1 I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1310 1310
Transmission 2–15 15–40 2–15 2–15 15–40

distance
Launched power –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0

(dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)



7-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
ADL4 ADQ1
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1
The IDL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDQ1 is a 4 x
STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA.
The IDL4 and IDQ1 can access and process 63×E1 inverse multiplexing ATM (IMA)
services if used with the E1 service processing board.
Table 7-24 shows the slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1.
Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1
Product IDL4 IDQ1
7.5.1 Functionality
Board IDL4 IDQ1
Function
Basic function Access and process 1 Access and process 4 STM-1 ATM
STM-4 ATM signal. signal.
Optical interface Support S-4.1, L-4.1. Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.
specifications
Connector Hot-swappable LC (SFP) Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
E3 ATM interface 12 x E3, inserted through 12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3

PD3/PL3
Maximum uplink 8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4 8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

bandwidth
ATM switching 1.2 Gbit/s 1.2 Gbit/s

capacity
Mapping mode VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)

(X=1–4)
7-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board IDL4 IDQ1

Function
IMA feature Access and process IMA service when used with the E1 service
processing board.
Process 63 x E1 IMA services.
Support up to 32 IMA groups, 1–32 E1 for each group.
The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR
ATM connection 8000
Statistics Supported
multiplexing
Traffic type and IETF RFC2514

QoS
ATM multicast Spacial multicast, logic multicast

connection
ATM protection Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring

(ITU-T I.630)
Board protection Support 1+1 backup
OAM function AIS, RDI,loopback (LB),continuity check (CC)

(ITU-T I.610)
Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer
level for maintenance and fault localization
Alarm and Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance
performance and fault location.
event
7.5.2 Principle
The working principle of the IDL4 and IDQ1 is similar to that of the ADL4 and ADQ1,
except that IMA processing is added to the ATM processing module. For the workings
of the IDL4 and IDQ1, refer to Figure 7-10.
7.5.3 Front Panel
Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1.l
7-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
IDL4 IDQ1
STAT STAT
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
CLASS 1 CLASS 1
LASER LASER
PRODUCT PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
IDL4 IDQ1
IDL4 IDQ1
Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the IDL4 and IDQ1.
2. Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The IDL4 has one pair and the IDQ1 has four pairs of
optical interfaces.
The IDL4 and IDQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
7-42
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The IDL4 and IDQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The working and protection
IDL4/IDQ1 boards should seat in paired slots. Table 7-25 lists the paired slots for the
IDL4 and the IDQ1.
Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1
Product Paired slots
OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s) (8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16), (2&17)
OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s) (8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16)
OptiX OSN 2500 (8&11), (7&12)
OptiX OSN 1500A (13&12)
OptiX OSN 1500B (13&12)

The parameters required by the IDL4 and IDQ1 are as follows:
J1
C2
ATM interface setting
Table 7-26 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM interface on the
IDL4/IDQ1.
Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1
Port type NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.
Traffic type Set according to the port.
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
Peak cell rate (PCR) Set the parameter for all types of services.
Sustainable cell rate Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
(SCR)
Maximum cell burst Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
size
7-43
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Cell delay variation Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or
tolerance (CDVT) UBR.

The IDL4 and IDQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
Table 7-27 shows the technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1.
Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1
IDL4 IDQ1
Access capacity 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
ATM processing 1.2 Gbit/s

capacity
IMA processing Process 63 E1s (provide 63 PHY addresses), and support 32 IMA
capacity groups.
Number of E1s within an IMA group is configurable, which can be
1–32. Support configurable IMA frame length.
Support IMA1.1 protocol. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Connector LC (SFP)
Dimensions (nm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01
Power 36.6 36.6

consumption (W)
Optical module S-4.1 L-4.1 I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1

type
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1310 1310
Transmission 2–15 15–40 2–15 2–15 15–40

distance
Launched power –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0

(dBm)

(dBm)
7-44
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
IDL4 IDQ1
(dBm)




7.6 MST4
The MST4 is a 4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board,
responsible for accessing and transmitting transparently fiber channel (FC), fiber
connection (FICON), enterprise systems connection (ESCON), and digital video
broadcast - asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) services.
Table 7-28 shows the slots for the MST4.
Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4
Product MST4
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13
7.6.1 Functionality
Board
MST4
Function
Provide four independent multi-service access interfaces and
Basic function support transparent transmission of 4 storage area network
(SAN)/video signals.
7-45
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Board
MST4
Function
Support FC50, FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI signal.
The service types and rates are shown in Table 7-29.
Support four-port FC service (FC50, FC100/FICON and FC200),
Service type with the total bandwidth not exceeding 2.5 Gbit/s.
Support transmission of FC service at full rate, that is, transmission
of one FC200 or two FC100, or four FC50 services.
Support four-port ESCON or DVB-ASI service.
Connector Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
The first and second interfaces support SDH side distance

extension function: FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports
Distance extension 1500 km.
function The first and second interfaces support client side distance
extension function: FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20
km.
Maximum uplink The backplane supports the connection of four 622 Mbit/s buses to
bandwidth the cross-connect unit. The total uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
Encapsulation Support GFP-T encapsulation format in compliance with ITU-T

format G.7041.
Mapping mode VC-4-Xc(X=1, 4, 8, 16)
Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level for

Maintenance
maintenance and fault localization
Alarm and Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance
performance event and fault location.
Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4
Service type Bit rate Remarks
FC50 531.25 Mbit/s Storage area network (SAN)
FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service
FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service
ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service
7.6.2 Principle
Figure 7-13 shows the working principle of the MST4.
7-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Backplane
FC ATM
Interface service Mapping Cross-connect
ESCON
module processing module unit
DVB-ASI module
FE
protocol
Control and
processin SCC
communication
g module
module
+3.3 V (Standby)
+5 V
Power
+2.5 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4
The interface processing module accesses the optical signal from external equipment
(such as Ethernet switch, router, SAN equipment, or multi-media equipment),
decodes the signal after O/E conversion and sends the signal to the encapsulation
module for GFP-T encapsulation. The encapsulated signal is sent to the mapping
module for mapping to VC-4-Xc or VC-4. And finally sent to the SDH cross-connect
unit.
If port 1 and port 2 need to implement distance extension function for FC100 and
FC200 services, the first and second signal from the interface processing module is
sent to the FC protocol processing module, then sent to the encapsulation module and
mapping module, and finally sent to the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment.
The VC-4-Xc signal from the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment is demapped
and then sent to the encapsulation module for de-encapsulation. The FC service
needing distance extension is sent to the FC protocol processing module. Other
services are sent to the interface processing module and then sent out after E/O
conversion.
3. Auxiliary Units
It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board.
Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.
7-47
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
7.6.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the MST4.
MST4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
MST4
Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4
1. Indicator
There are four indicators on the MST4.
2. Interface
Number of optical interfaces: The MSTE has four pairs of optical interfaces.
7-48
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The MST4 uses swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
Parameters to be configured for the MST4:
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point
identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two
ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path
will generate the HP TIM alarm. J1 byte is set as “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received, once
mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and
insert all “1”s into the C4.
The MST4 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX
OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
Table 7-30 shows the technical parameters of the MST4.
Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4
Optical interface type LC (SFP)
Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4
Weight (kg) 0.9




7-49
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
This chapter introduces cross-connect and system control boards of the OptiX OSN
3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
Refer to Table 4-4 for the name and descriptions of the cross-connect and system
control boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.
8-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE
The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS is the cross-connect and synchronous timing board of the
OptiX OSN 3500. The XCE is a lower-order cross-connect and synchronous timing
board used for extended subracks. The GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE, seated in slot
9 or 10 on the subrack, implement the functions of cross-connection and system
timing.
The GXCS is an ordinary cross-connect and synchronous timing board, but the EXCS
is an enhanced one, and the UXCS is a super one. The UXCS can also be classified
into UXCSA and UXCSB. Table 8-1 shows their differences.
Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
Cross-connect Higher order Lower order Usage
and timing cross-connect cross-conne
board capability ct capacity
GXCSA 40 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not
supporting the extended subrack.
EXCSA 80 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not

UXCSA 80 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not

UXCSB 80 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not

supporting the 1.25 Gbit/s extended
subrack.
XCE 0 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s Used for the extended subrack.(Note)

Note: The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is adopted.
8.1.1 Functionality
Support VC-4 unblocked higher order full cross-connect and VC-3 or VC-12
unblocked lower order full cross-connect. For the cross-connect capacity of
different boards, see Table 8-1.
Provide flexible service grooming capability, and support loopback, cross-connect,
multicast and broadcast services.
Support SNCP protection at VC-3 or VC-12.
The XCE provides 1.25 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capability and is capable
of adding/dropping up to 504 E1s/T1s.
Support such concatenation services as AU4-4C, AU4-8C, AU4-16C, and
AU4-64C.
Support 1+1 hot backup, with the protection mode being revertive switching and
non-revertive switching.
Support smooth upgrade from GXCS to EXCS or UXCS, with signal failure time
less than 50ms.
Support smooth upgrade from EXCS to UXCS, with signal failure time less than
50ms.
8-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Process S1 byte to realize clock protection switching.

Input and output two channels of synchronization clock, with clock signal set to 2
MHz or 2 Mbit/s.
Communicate with other boards.
8.1.2 Principle
Here takes the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board as an example to introduce their working
principle, as shown in Figure 8-1. The working principle of the XCE board is little
different from that of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board, only supporting lower order
cross-connect.
Lower order cross-
connect matrix
5 Gbit/s or
20 Gbit/s
Higher order cross-

connect matrix Board and system
Timing
40 Gbit/s or
VC-4 unit Clock source
80 Gbit/s
+3.3 V
Power Communication
-48 V +5 V
module and control unit
+2.7 V
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS
1. Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix

The GXCS performs 40 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect, and the
EXCS or UXCS performs 80 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect.
2. Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix

GXCS or EXCS implement 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked
full cross-connect. UXCS implement 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize
unblocked full cross-connect. They are providing the system with powerful service
grooming capability.
3. Timing Unit
Trace the external clock source or internal clock source, providing itself and the
system with the synchronization clock source. At the same time, it provides various
nodes in the data flow of the system with clock signals appropriate to the frequency
and phase, so that the devices at each node can meet the requirements for data setup
time and hold time, and provide the system with framing signals for identifying the
position of the frame head in the data.
4. Control and Communication Unit

Communicate with the SCC and other boards, and ensure communication with other
boards when the SCC is not in position. It also generates various other control signals
8-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
for the GXCS/EXCS and system.
5. Power Module
Provides power supply of various voltages for the board.
8.1.3 Front Panel
Figure 8-2 shows the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS, and XCE.
GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA UXCSB XCE

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
1. Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to
indicate their working status. The description of the indicators is shown in Table 8-2
8-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

Indicator Color and status Description
STAT (red or On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.
Off The board is not powered on, or no

service is configured.
ACT (green) On The service is activated.
Off The service is not activated.
PROG (red or On, green The board software or software for FPGA
green) is uploaded successfully, or the board
software is initialized successfully.
On for 100ms and off for The board software or software for FPGA
100ms alternatively, is being uploaded.
green
On for 300ms and off for The board software is being initialized,
300ms alternatively, and is in BIOS boot stage.
green
On, red The board software or software for FPGA

is lost, or failed in uploading or in
initializing.
Off No power supply.
SRV (red, yellow On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm
or green) occurs.
On, red A critical or major alarm occurs to

service.
On, yellow A minor or remote alarm occurs to

service.
Off No service is configured.
SYNC (red or On, green The clock works in synchronous status.

green)
On, red The clock works in hold-over or free-run
mode.
2. Interfaces
There are interfaces on the front panel of UXCSB/XCE for connecting extended
subrack cables. “EXA” and “EXB” backup each other. Through these two interfaces,
the main subrack and the extended subrack can be connected, as shown in Figure
8-3.
8-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
AUX
PIU
PIU
FAN FAN FAN
S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
XCE
XCE
PQ1/PQM (P)
EXB EXA
EXB EXA
(1)(2)(3) (4)
Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks

(1) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 9)
on the main subrack.
(2) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 9)
(3) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 10)
(4) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 10)
The input/output interface for external clock of the cross-connect and synchronous
timing board is on the AUX board. Here only the interface names are given, as shown
in Table 8-3. For a detailed description of relevant interfaces, refer to the interface
description of the AUX board.
Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS
Interface name Description Interface type
CLKO1 75-ohm clock output interface 1 SMB
CLKO2 75-ohm clock output interface 2 SMB
CLKI1 75-ohm clock input interface 1 SMB
CLKI2 75-ohm clock input interface 2 SMB
CLK1 120- ohm clock interface 1 RJ-45
CLK2 120-ohm clock interface 2 RJ-45

The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE supports 1+1 protection.
8-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to be set through NM are as
follows.
1. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM)

is not Started
Primary reference clock
Trace level of clock source
2. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started

Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)
S1 byte
Threshold for clock switching protection
The GXCSA of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two versions: N1 and N2, as described in
Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
Item Description
Similarity Board functions and board software are the same.
Difference Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware.
NM support The T2000 does not distinguish N1 from N2.
Product Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003)

support supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA.
The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other.

Version Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program,
replacement select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the
upgrading will fail.
The EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE have only one version: N1. They are only
applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and extended subrack.
Technical Parameters
Table 8-5 shows the technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
GXCSA EXCSA UXCSA UXCSB XCE
Higher order 40 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 0 Gbit/s
cross-connect capability
Lower order 5 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

cross-connect capacity
8-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
GXCSA EXCSA UXCSA UXCSB XCE
External clock 2 channels, 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 40 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.81 2.00 2.00 2.00 1.50
Power consumption (W) 27 62 65 65 25
Long-term working Temperature: 0°C to 45°C

Short-term working Temperature: –5°C to 50°C



8-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are boards integrating the functions of the SDH
processing unit, system control & communication unit, cross-connect unit and timing
unit. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500.
The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 9–10 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.
The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 4–5 in the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack.
Table 8-6 shows a comparison among them.
Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Board name CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
Line processing capacity 1 x STM-1 1 x STM-4 1 x STM-16
Cross-connect capacity (higher 20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s

order)
Cross-connect capacity (lower 5 Gbit/s/20 5 Gbit/s/20 5 Gbit/s/20

order) (Note) Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s
Clock function Same
System control function Same

Note: The CXL series boards have two versions: Q1 and Q2. The lower order cross-connect capacity
of Q1 version is 5 Gbit/s and that of Q2 version is 20 Gbit/s.
8.2.1 Functionality
1. SDH Processing Unit
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are responsible for receiving and transmitting
one optical signal at STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 level respectively. Their optical
interfaces are compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.957, frame structures
compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.707, and the jitter specifications
compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.958.
The CXL1 supports S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2 optical modules for different
transmission distances.
The CXL4 supports S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 optical modules for different
The CXL16 supports I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical modules for different
The CXL16 supports VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C and VC-4-16C concatenated services.
Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional
MS ring protection, linear MSP and SNCP.
Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.
Support ALS function, avoiding laser injury to human body during maintenance.
Support on-line query of the board information and the optical power.
8-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Support smooth software upgrade and capacity expansion.
2. System Control & Communication Unit

Configure and groom service, monitor service performance, and collect
performance events and alarm information.
Provide 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection.
Provide F&f interface through the SEI board for COA management.
Provide one 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between various
boards.
Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active
and standby CXL.
Provide the OAM interface through SEI, supporting remote maintenance of the
Modem of RS232 DCE.
Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management.
Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.
3. Cross-Connect Unit
Implement 20 Gbit/s VC-4 full cross-connection and 5 Gbit/s20/Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3
full cross-connection respectively.
Provide two 4 Mbit/s HDLC emergency paths for MSP and SNCP.
Support flexible service grooming, including loopback, cross-connection, multicast,
and broadcasting.
Provisioning/removing service does not affect other services.
Support SNCP at VC-3 and VC-12 levels.
Support AU4-4C, AU4-8C and AU4-16C concatenated services.
Support 1+1 hot backup protection, both revertive and non-revertive mode. The
default is non-revertive.
4. Timing Unit
Provide standard system synchronization clock.
Input two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals, and is capable of selecting the
external timing source.
Output two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals.
Provide SSM, extract, insert and process clock ID.
8.2.2 Principle
The CXL16 is taken as an example in the following description. Figure 8-4 shows the
functional block diagram of the CXL16. The CXL16 integrates the STM-16 SDH
processing unit, cross-connect unit, system control & communication unit and timing
unit.
8-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Front panel Backplane

STM-16 SDH
processing unit
Cross connect unit
System control and

communication unit
Timing unit
Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16
8.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Figure 8-5.
CXL1 CXL4 CXL16

STAT STAT STAT
ACTX ACTX ACTX
ACTC ACTC ACTC
PROG PROG PROG
SRVX SRVX SRVX
SRVL SRVL SRVL
SYNC SYNC SYNC
ALMC ALMC ALMC
CLASS 1 CLASS 1 CLASS 1

LASER LASER LASER
PRODUCT PRODUCT PRODUCT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
RESET RESET RESET
ALM CUT ALM CUT ALM CUT
CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
CXL1 CXL4 CXL16

Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
1. Indicators
The indicator description of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Table 8-7.
8-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

STAT On, green The board works normally.
Off The board is not powered on, or service is not

configured.
ACTX On, green The cross-connect unit is in active status.
Off The cross-connect unit is in standby status.
ACTC On, green The system control & communication unit is in

active status.
Off The system control & communication unit is in

standby status.
PROG On, green The board software or software for FPGA is

uploaded successfully, or the board software
is initialized successfully.
On for 100ms and off for The board software or software for FPGA is
100ms alternatively, being uploaded.
green
On for 300ms and off for The board software is being initialized, and is
300ms alternatively, in BIOS boot stage.
green
On, red The board software or software for FPGA is

lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.
SRVX On, green Service operates normally on the

cross-connect unit.
On, red Switching (for example, TPS) occurs to the

service on the cross-connect unit.
SRVL On, green Service operates normally on the line unit, and
no service alarm occurs.
On, red A critical or major alarm occurs to the line

service.
On, yellow A minor or remote alarm occurs to the line

service.
Off The line service is not configured or no power

supply.
ALMC On, yellow Alarm is cut off permanently.
Off Alarm is normally provided.
8-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

SYNC (red On, green The clock works in synchronous status.
or green)
On, red The clock works in a hold-over or free-run
mode.
2. Interfaces
The interfaces on the front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are shown in
Table 8-8.
Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL
Name Description Function
Line optical interface LC Receive and transmit optical signal.
Use swappable optical module for
convenient maintenance.
RESET Reset button Press the button to warm reset the SCC
unit.
ALM CUT Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible
alarms for once.
Press and hold the ALM CUT for three
seconds to cut off audible alarms
permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT
again to enable audible alarms.

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 support 1+1 protection.
The parameters required by the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are as follows.
1. J1
J1 is the path trace byte. It is used to transmit repetitively a higher order access point
identifier so that the receive end can verify its continued connection to the intended
transmit end. When J1 mismatch is detected at receive end, the corresponding VC-4
path will generate an HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
2. C2
mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_SLM alarm
Table 8-9 associates C2 byte setting to service type.
8-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type

service type C2 byte setting
E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s/45 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-3
E4 140 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-4
Null Unloaded
3. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM)

is not Started
4. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started

Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)
S1 byte
Threshold for clock switching protection
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 have two versions: Q1 and Q2. Except that
cross-connect capacity and software features, the two versions support the same
functions.
Q1CXL1/Q1CXL4/Q1CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and
lower order cross-connect capacity is 5 Gbit/s. On the T2000, the Q1CXL board is
displayed as three logic boards: CXL, SCC and Q1SL1/4/16.
Q2CXL1/Q2CXL4/Q2CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and
lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. Support intelligent features. On the
T2000, the Q2CXL is displayed as three logic boards: ECXL, GSCC and Q1SL1/4/16.
The technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are shown in Table 8-10.
Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
Bit rate 155520 kbit/s 622080 kbit/s 2488320 kbit/s
Connector LC
Dimensions H
(mm) D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.12 1.12 1.12
8-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
Power 40 40 40
consumption (W)
CXL1
Optical module S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Le-1.2
type
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1550 1550
Transmission 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100

distance (km)
Launched power –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 2

(dBm)
Receiver –28 –34 –34 –34

sensitivity (dBm)
Receiver overload –8 –10 –10 –10

(dBm)
CXL4
Optical module S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Le-4.2
type
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1550 1550
Transmission 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100

distance (km)
Launched power –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2

(dBm)
Receiver –28 –28 –28 –33

sensitivity (dBm)
Receiver overload –8 –8 –8 –8
(dBm)
CXL16
Optical module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
type
Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550
Transmission 0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80

distance (km)
Launched power –10 to 3 –5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3

(dBm)
Receiver –18 –18 –27 –28

sensitivity (dBm)
Receiver –3 0 –9 –9
overload (dBm)
8-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
working condition Humidity: 10%–90%

working condition Humidity: 5%–95%


8.3 SCC/GSCC
The SCC is the system control and communication board, seated in slot 17 or 18.
It functions main control, orderwire, communication and system power monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 3500 also provides the GSCC that supports intelligent features and
extended subrack.
8.3.1 Functionality
Support 1+1 hot backup protection. When the active board fails, the service will
switch to the standby board automatically.
Monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm
information.
Provide the F&f interface through the AUX board for management of case-shape
optical amplifier (COA).
Provide one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface (the port is on the AUX
board) for communication with the NM.
Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active
and standby SCCs.
Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management
information.
Process such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and Serial 1–4.
Provide one 64 k codirectional data interface F1 through AUX.
Provide the OAM interface through AUX, supporting remote maintenance of the
Modem of RS232 data connected equipment (DCE).
Monitor –48 V power supply of the system.
Support control of four cabinet indicators.
Process 16 housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs.
Support management of intelligent fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.
8-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
8.3.2 Principle
Caution:
There are four important databases on the SCC: mdb, drdb, fdb0 and fdb1.
The mdb is in the dynamic random-access memory (RAM), saving the current
databases. The drdb is saved in flash RAM. When power failure occurs to NE, the
databases will be recovered in the order of drdb→fdb0→fdb1. The drdb will be
checked first for configuration data. If the configuration data are safe in drdb, they will
be recovered to mdb from drdb; if they are damaged, data will be recovered from fdb0
or fdb1, depending on which saves the latest data. If data in fdb0 are also damaged,
fdb1 is used for data recovery. Therefore, it is important to back up data to fdb0 and
fdb1 and compare the data in them.
Figure 8-6 shows the functional block diagram of the SCC.

F1 16 alarm inputs and 4 alarm outputs interface
1 orderwire phone Overhead Power 5 cabinet alarm indicator interface
2 SDH NNI phones processing monitoring AUX backup power alarm detection
Serial 1-4 module module Fan alarm detection and management
40 DCCs (D1-D3) PIU alarm detection and management
NM interface
Control Communication
F&f
module module
OAM
+3.3 V
Power
-48 V +2.7 V
module
+5 V
Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC
1. Control Module
The control module configures and manages boards and NEs, collect alarms and
performance events, and backs up important data.
The control module processes 40 DCC (D1–D3) bytes.
2. Communication Module
The communication module provides 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet
interface for NM connection, F&f interface for managing external devices such as
COA, and the OAM interface. The communication module also process 40 DCCs to
provide the transmit link for network management.
3. Overhead Processing Module

The overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the line slot and
8-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serials 1–4. The overhead processing
module also sends overhead signals to the line board, and externally provides one
orderwire interface, two SDH NNI audio interfaces, interface F1, and the broadcast
data interfaces serials 1–4.
The position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 8-7.
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3 Serial 1 Serial2
AU_PTR
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 Serial 4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12 Serial3
S1 M1 E2
Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
4. Power Monitoring Module

The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power.
The working power provides the SCC with working voltage and detects and
switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through
AUX).
The –48 V power monitoring module monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX,
monitors fan alarms, monitors and manages the PIU, and processes sixteen
housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs as well as the
cabinet alarm indicator signal.
8.3.3 Front Panel
The SCC front panel is shown in Figure 8-8.
8-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
SCC
Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC
1. Switch
The switch description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-11
Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC
Name Function
RESET Reset button
ALM CUT Alarm cut switch

Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once.
Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off
audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT
8-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Indicators
The indicator description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-12
Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC
green)

ACT (green) On The service is activated.
Off The service is not activated.
PROG (red or On, green The board software or software for

green) FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
On for 100ms and off The board software or software for

for 100ms alternatively, FPGA is being uploaded.
green
On for 300ms and off The board software is being initialized,

for 300ms alternatively, and is in BIOS boot stage.
green
On, red The board software or software for

FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in
initializing.
SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, no service alarm

yellow or green) occurs.
On, red A critical or major alarm occurs to

service.
On, yellow A minor or remote alarm occurs to

service.
Off No service is configured.
PWRA (red or On, green The –48 V power supply A is normal.

green)
On (red/off) The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost
or failed).
PWRB (red or On, green The –48 V power supply B is normal.

green)
On (red/off) The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost
or failed).
8-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

PWRC (red or On, green The 3.3 V protection power is normal.
green)
On, red The 3.3 V protection power is lost.
ALMC (yellow) On, green Permanent alarm cut-off.
Off Give audible warning upon alarm.

Note: Power supply A indicates the first power input.
Power supply B indicates the second power input.
3. Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the SCC are led out through the AUX. For details, refer to
the interface description of the AUX.
The SCC has one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. It does not
support intelligent features or extended subracks.
The GSCC has two versions: N1 and N2. The N1GSCC is applicable to the OptiX
OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features or extended subracks. The N2GSCC is
applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent
features.
Table 8-13 shows the technical parameters of the SCC.
Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC
Processing capability System control, inter-board communication,
orderwire, and power detection
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 0.88
Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C

Humidity: 10%–90%
Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C

Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C

8-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
8.4 CRG
The CRG is the system control and clock unit of the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, seated in
slots 9–10. It implements control, orderwire, communication, and clock assignment
and tracing functions.
8.4.1 Functionality
1. System Control and Communication Unit
Implement service configuration and grooming, monitor service performance, and
collect performance events and alarm information.
Provide the F&f interface through the SEI board for management of case-shape
optical amplifier (COA).
Provide a 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface through the SEI board for
communication with the NM.
Provide the RS232 DCE remote maintenance interface (X.25) through SEI,
supporting the access of Modem
Process 40 data communication channels (DCCs) to provide the transmit link for
network management
Process such bytes as E1, Serial 1–4, F1, D1–D12, and ID.
Provide transparent transmission of D1–D12 bytes of other manufacturers.
Provide two 485 bus lines for communication between boards. The two lines
backup each other.
Provide a 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for communication
between boards, and report of board alarm information and performance
information.
Provide a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between active and
standby SCC boards.
Monitor –48 V power supply of the system.
Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Support control of four cabinet indicators.
Support revertive or nonrevertive switching between active and standby boards
without impact on services.
Support warm reset, cold reset and reset by pressing button. The warm reset does
not affect services.
Support querying board information, which includes board software version, FPGA
version, BIOS version, and board manufacturing information.
2. Clock Unit
Implement system timing function, which complies with the timing characteristics of
SDH equipment slave clocks under REG mode specified in ITU-T G.813.
When REG works normally, the clock at the transmit end is synchronized with that
at the receive end. The clock works in pass-through mode. If the clock at the
receive end is lost, the clock at the transmit end traces the free-run clock in the
equipment. The accuracy is greater than 20 ppm.
Support trace and free-run working modes and switching between the two. The
8-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
current working mode can be queried.

Support processing S1 byte.
Support setting and querying the clock trace source priority table.
The reference clock source of the system clock is the line clock or clock within the
system.
8.4.2 Principle
Figure 8-9 shows the functional block diagram of the CRG.
NM interface
System control Communication
F&f
module module
FPGA OAM
Timing 2K Boards in
Line clock from other slots
module 38M
line units
5V
Power Detecting
-48 V 3.3 V module
module
1.5 V
Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG
1. System Control Module

Configure and manage the board and NEs, collect alarms and performance events,
and backup important data.
It provides:
10 Mbit/s/100Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interfaces for connection with NM and
communication between boards.
F&f interface to manage external equipment such as COA as well as OAM
interface to support maintenance and management.
communication processing function through ECC channel.
3. FPGA
It is a software processing module.
4. Clock Module
When the REG works normally, the clock module extracts and traces the line clock
received by the source end, and provides system clock signals (2 kbit/s or 38 Mbit/s
signals, for example) required by the system.
5. Detection Module
It detects board temperature, power supply (over-voltage and under-voltage), clock
8-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
frequency deviation and failure.
6. Power Module
The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power.
The working power provides the CRG board with working voltage and detects and
switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX).
The –48 V power monitoring monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors and
manages the fan, and processes housekeeping alarm inputs and outputs as well as
the cabinet alarm indicator signal.
8.4.3 Front Panel
Figure 8-10 shows the front panel of the CRG.
CRG
STAT
ACTC
PROG
SYNC
ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
CRG
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG
1. Switch
The switch description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-14.
Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG
Name Function
RESET Reset button
8-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Name Function
ALM CUT Alarm cut switch
Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once.
Press and hold the ALM CUT for five seconds to cut off
audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT
2. Indicators
The indicator description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-15.
Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG
green)

ACTC (green) On The CRG is in the active status.
Off The CRG is in the standby status.

successfully.
On for 100ms and off The board software or software for

for 100ms alternatively, FPGA is being uploaded.
green
On for 300ms and off The board software is being initialized,

for 300ms alternatively, and is in BIOS boot stage.
green

FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in
initializing.
SYNC (red or On, green The clock works in synchronous status

green)
On, red Clock source is lost and the clock is
working in the hold-over or free-run
mode.
ALMC (yellow) On Permanent alarm cut-off
Off Audible warning upon alarm.
8-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3. Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the CRG are led out through the SEI. For details, refer to
the interface description of the SEI.
The CRG has one version Q1. It is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 REG.
Table 8-16 shows the technical parameters of the CRG.
Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG
Processing capability System control, inter-board communication,
orderwire, and power detection
Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4
Weight (kg) 0.90

Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%


8-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 9 Other Boards
9 Other Boards
This chapter introduces the optical amplifier board, built-in WDM unit, power board,
orderwire board and auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
9.1 LWX
The LWX is an arbitrary rate wavelength conversion board, converting signal of
arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s NRZ encoding) at the client side into standard
wavelength optical signal in compliance with G.692.
Table 9-1 shows the slots for the LWX in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX
Product LWX
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13
9.1.1 Functionality
Convert client-side signals into ITU-T G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard
9-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
wavelength signals and transmit the signals transparently.

Provide 3R function for client-side signals (at the rate of 10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s),
perform clock recovery and monitor its rate.
Provide two types of LWX board: one is single-fed single receiving, and the other is
dual-fed signal selection.
The dual-fed signal selection LWX supports intra-board protection, realizing optical
channel protection with one board. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
The single-fed single receiving LWX supports inter-board protection, that is, 1+1
inter-board hot backup protection. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
Support sub-carrier modulation to realize ECC communication.
The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and channel spacing is 100 GHz.
Support automatic laser shutdown function (ALS). When no light is received, the
corresponding optical transmitting module will be automatically shut down.
Support inloop and outloop function at optical interface level for fault location.
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient maintenance.
Note:
Sub-carrier modulation: Couple a weak 2.4 Gbit/s signal (after spreading) into the
service signal and then modulate the laser. Obtain 2.4 Gbit/s signal through the
bandpass filter after O/E conversion at the receiving end and then get the original
signal through demodulation.
9.1.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the LWX board is shown in Figure 9-1.
Backplane
ITU-T G.692 wavelength
10 Mbit/s -
2.7 Gbit/s Optical Performance
Client side transponder WDM side and alarm SCC
10 Mbit/s - module monitoring
2.7 Gbit/s
Control and
communication SCC
module
+3.3 V (Standby)
+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX
9-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
The optical transponder module processes 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s optical signal received
from the client side. At the DWDM side, the LWX outputs ITU-T G.692-compliant
standard wavelength signal. The optical transponder module can separate one
channel of signal to the performance monitoring circuit for counting B1 bit errors. The
optical transponder module has jitter suppression function which guarantees good
jitter suppression performance.
The LWX receives ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal from the
DWDM side. The optical transponder module processes the optical signal and outputs
the 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s signal at the client side .
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
Provide power supply of various voltages for the board.
9.1.3 Front Panel
Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the LWX board.
9-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
LWX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX RX
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
LWX
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the LWX.
2. Interfaces
The LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX are described in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX
Interface Type Description
IN1/IN2 LC Receive the signals from the optical add/drop multiplexing
board MR2.
OUT1/OUT2 LC Send signals to the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.
TX LC Send service signal to client-side equipment.
9-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

RX LC Receive the service signal from client-side equipment.
Note: IN1/OUT1 is a pair of receive/transmit optical interfaces, and IN2/OUT2 is another pair.

The LWX has only one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 show the optical interface parameters on client side and
DWDM side of the LWX. Table 9-5 shows the technical parameters of the LWX.
Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
Item Unit Description
Bit rate 10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s
Source type MLM SLM SLM
Transmission distance km 2 15 80
Characteristics of transmitter at point S
Operating wavelength nm 850 1260–1360 1500–158

range 0
Maximum mean dBm –3 0 +3

launched power
Min. mean launched dBm –10 –5 –2

power
Min. extinction ratio dB +8.2 +8.2 +8.2
Min. side mode dB NA 30 30

suppression ratio
Eye pattern G.957 G.957 compliant G.957

compliant compliant
Characteristics of receiver at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200–1600 1200–1600 1200–160

range 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –28
Min. receiver overload dBm –3 0 –9
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27
9-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

Item Unit Description
Channel spacing GHz 100
Characteristics of transmitter at point Sn
Transmission distance km 640 170 80
Maximum mean launched dBm –2 –2 –2

power
Min. mean launched dBm +3 +3 +3

power
Min. extinction ratio dB +10 +10 +10
Nominal central frequency THz 192.10–196. 192.10–196.00 192.10–196.00

00
Central frequency offset GHz ±12.5 ±12.5 ±12.5
Maximum –20 dB nm 0.2 0.4 0.4

spectrum width
Min. side mode dB 35 35 35

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance value ps/nm 12800 2400 1600
Eye pattern G.957 G.957 G.957

compliant compliant compliant
Characteristics of receiver at point Rn
Receiver type APD PIN
Operating wavelength nm 1200–1600 1200–1600

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm –31 –21
Min. receiver overload dBm –9 0
Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27
Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX

Line code pattern NRZ encoding
Connector LC
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.10
9-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500




9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C are 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing boards,
adding/dropping and multiplexing any adjacent two channels of signals.
MR2A: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR2B: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)
MR2C: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)
Table 9-6 shows the slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C
OptiX OSN product MR2A MR2B MR2C
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Slots 1–8, Not supported Slots 19–26, 29–36
Gbit/s) 11–17
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Slots 1–8, Not supported Slots 19–26, 29–36
Gbit/s) 11–16
OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–8, Slots 5–6, Slots 1–4, 15–18
11–13 19–21
OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported Not supported Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 6–9, Not supported

12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 6–9, 1–3, Slots 14–17
11–13
9.2.1 Functionality
Add/drop two adjacent standard wavelengths in compliance with ITU-T G.692
(DWDM), with signals transmitted transparently and operating wavelength ranging
from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.
Serve as an OTM or OADM station adding/dropping two channels, as shown in
Figure 9-3.
9-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Two MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards connected in serial can form an OTM station

adding/dropping four channels, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Work with the LWX to form an OADM station to add/drop two channels of signals.
The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and the channel spacing is 100 GHz.
Drop1 Drop2 Drop1 Drop2 Drop1 Drop2

Out MI Out MI Out MI
MR2A/ MR2A/ MR2A/
MR2B/ MR2B/ MR2B/
MR2C MR2C MR2C
In MO In MO In MO
Add1 Add2 Add1 Add2 Add1 Add2
(1) (2)
(1) MR2A/MR2B/MR2C can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping two channels.

(2) Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping four
channels.
Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station
In Out
Drop1 Add2
MR2A/
LWX MR2B/ LWX
MR2C
Add1 Drop2
MI MO
Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals
9.2.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board is shown in Figure 9-5.
9-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Front
panel Backplane
Out
Add1
Add2
MI OADM
MO module
Drop2
Drop1
In
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C mainly includes the OADM module adding/dropping two

channels of signals. The OADM adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.
It also provides concatenation interfaces to connect other add/drop multiplexing
boards for more powerful add/drop capability. The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C is a passive
board has no interface with the backplane.
9.2.3 Front Panel
Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the MR2A board. The front panel of the MR2 B and
MR2C is the same as the MR2A board, except the panel dimensions.
9-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
MR2A
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
AO1
AO2 M I
MO
DO2
DO1 IN
MR2A
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A
1. Indicators
None
2. Interfaces
There are four pairs of LC optical interfaces on the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C front panel, as
described in Table 9-7.
Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
A01–A02 LC Access two channels of service signal added locally.
D01–D02 LC Drop two channels of service signal locally.
IN LC Receive two channels of multiplexed signal.
OUT LC Send two channels of multiplexed signal.
MO/MI LC Concatenation interface, through which multiple

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards can be concatenated.
9-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C have only one version: N1. They are applicable to the
OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 9-8 shows the technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C.
Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
Operating wavelength Any two adjacent channels with G.692 (DWDM)
compliant standard wavelength, with operating
wavelength being 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm
Connector LC
Channel spacing (GHz) 100
Insertion loss (dB) <2
Adjacent channel isolation >25

(dB)
Non-adjacent channel >35

isolation (dB)
–0.5 dB channel <0.11

wavelength (nm)
Dimensions (mm) MR2A: 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

MR2B: 111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
MR2C: 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg) 1.01




9-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.3 BA2/BPA
The BA2 is a 2-port booster amplifier board. The BPA is a booster amplifier &
pre-amplifier board.
Table 9-9 shows the slots for the BA2 and BPA in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA
Product BA2 BPA
9.3.1 Functionality
Increase the launched power of line board to +14 dBm or +17 dBm, thus to
achieving a transmission distance of above 120 km or 130 km (in the case of G.652
optical fiber and 0.275 dB/km power loss on such fiber).
The BPA uses the pre-amplifier (PA) module to pre-amplify the received optical
signal and increase the power gain of weak signals to 22 dB–25 dB, thus improving
the receiver sensitivity to –38 dBm.
Control automatically laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module.
Support automatic monitoring of input and output optical power and querying of the
optical power of the EDFA module.
Support report of laser performance parameters.
Support the protection function of EDFA module. When no light is input, the
software will automatically shut down the laser; when light is input again, the
software will automatically start the laser.
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
9.3.2 Application
In the long distance transmission, the attenuation of optical signal is great. To make
the optical receiver receive normal optical signal, BA and PA are needed.
The position of BA and PA in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-7.
9-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Transmit BA Receive
Transmit PA Receive
Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network
9.3.3 Principle
Figure 9-8 shows the functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA.
Optical input Optical output Optical input Optical output
Fixed filter
EDFA optical module 1 EDFA optical module 2

Optics part
Pump Module Input/output Pump Drive Module Input/output

Drive
current temperature pow er current module temperature pow er Drive and
module
check control check check control check check part
A/D and D/A conversion
Data processing and

Communication Control communication part
SCC module module
Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA
1. Optics Part
This part is composed of two EDFA optical modules for optical amplification.
2. Drive and Check Part

This part provides the EDFA optical modules with drive current, checks working status
of each part of the EDFA optical modules, and forecasts and handles the possible
faults.
This drive and check part also checks the pump current, drives the optical module,
controls the optical module and checks the input and output optical power.
3. Data Processing and Communication Part

This part comprises central processing unit (CPU) and peripheral chips. Analysis of
the measuring result of the check circuit is conducted at this part. Then, the drive
9-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
circuit will be adjusted within the rated range according to the analysis result, so that
the gain of EDFA optical modules and the output optical power can be regulated
above the rated value. Any abnormity indicated by the measured value will be
arranged and reported to NM.
9.3.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the BA2 and BPA is shown in Figure 9-9.
BA2 BPA
STAT STAT
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
OUT1 OUT2 OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2 IN1 IN2
BA2 BPA
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the BA2 and BPA.
2. Interfaces
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BA2 and BPA for
9-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
receiving and transmitting optical signal. Using swappable optical module is easy for
maintenance.
The BA2 and BPA have only one version N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN
3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.
The technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA are shown in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA
BA2 BPA
Bit rate 2488320 kbit/s and 9953280 kbit/s
Processing capability 2-channel power 1-channel power

amplification amplification and
1-channel
pre-amplification
Connector LC
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01
Power consumption (W) 20 20
Operating wavelength range BA: 1530–1565 BA: 1530–1565

(nm) PA: 1550.12
Input power range (dBm) BA: –6 to +3 BA: –6 to +3

PA: –10 to –38
Output power (dBm) BA: +14 or +17 BA: +14 or +17
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) – PA: –38
Noise figure (dB) <6.5 BA: <6.5, PA: <6
Type of optical interface V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2,

V-64.2, U-64.2 V-64.2, U-64.2


9-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
BA2 BPA

9.4 COA
The COA, a case-shape optical amplifier, integrates the EDFA module, drive circuit
and communication circuit in an aluminium case. Two types of COA are available:
61COA and 62COA.
Note:
The COA mentioned below includes 61COA and 62COA.
The 61COA is used for 1550 nm window. Its appearance is shown in Figure 9-10. The
61COA is equipped with only one EDFA optical module and can work as optical
amplifier, pre-amplifier or line amplifier. The optical characteristics of the 61COA are
the same as those of the BPA and the BA2. The COA is externally installed and does
not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can be installed in the ETSI cabinet but needs
separate power supply. Each OptiX OSN 3500 can work with up to two 61COAs.
Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA)
The 62COA is a case-shape Raman amplifier used at the receiving end of the SDH
equipment. It inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman
amplification. The gain medium of Raman amplification is the line fiber that can realize
better noise performance. Therefore, the 62COA can extend the transmission
distance, lower the signal-to-noise ratio and realize ultra long hop transmission for a
single span. Figure 9-11 shows the appearance of the 62COA.
9-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1
2
3
1. Captive screw 2. Ejector lever 3. COA board

4. ESD jack 5. Power access board
Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA
9.4.1 Functionality
The 61COA is an erbium doped fiber amplifier, mainly used as optical booster
amplifier. It can raise the launched optical power of the line board up to +14 dBm or
+17dBm, thus extending the transmission distance.
The 61COA can also work as the preamplifier with the receiver sensitivity of –38
dBm.
The 62COA is configured at the receiving end of the SDH system as a Raman
amplifier. It works with an EDFA of +17 dBm at the transmitting end to realize the
transmission of more than 170 km.
The 62COA provides the preamplification function with the receiver sensitivity of
–39 dBm.
The 61COA and 62COA support automatic laser shutdown.
Communicate with the SCC board through RS-232 serial port, report the alarms
and performance events of the local board to the NM and receive configuration
commands from the NM.
The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can
work separately.
9.4.2 Application
The 61COA is applied in the optical transmission system in the same way as the BA2
and BPA.
The 62COA is a Raman fiber amplifier, used at the receiving end of the optical
transmission system. It amplifies optical signal by means of stimulated Raman
scattering (SRS) effect. The 62 COA needs to work with the EDFA to realize the
transmission of more than170 km, as shown in Figure 9-12.
9-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Raman Amplifier
Signal light
Optical
EDFA Pump light receiver
Pump light
Fiber Laser
Transmitting end Coupler Receiving end
Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)
The Raman amplifier inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed
Raman amplification. Counter pumping means the pump light is injected at the fiber
end and the direction is opposite to the main signals. This kind of pumping results in a
big phase difference between the main signals and the pump light. And the Raman
pump power vibration is leveled in the reverse direction of signal transmission, thus
effectively suppressing the noise created by pump.
9.4.3 Principle
The functional block diagram of the 61COA board is shown in Figure 9-13.
Optical input Optical output
Fixed filter
EDFA optical module

Optics part
Pump Drive Module Input/output

current module temperature power Drive and
check control check check part
A/D and D/A conversion
Data processing and

Communicatio Control communication part
SCC n module module
Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA
1. Optics Part
It consists of EDFA to amplify the optical signal.
2. Drive and Check Part

It provides the EDFA with driving current and detects the working status of the
components of the EDFA. It predicts and processes the possible faults.
It implements the functions such as detecting pump current, driving optical module
controlling optical module temperature, and detecting input/output optical power.
9-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
3. Data Processing and Communication Part

It consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. It analyzes the measurement results of the
detected circuit. Based on the analysis, it adjusts the driving circuit within the nominal
range to keep the EDFA gain or power output at the nominal value level. It sorts out
the abnormalities indicated by the measured value and reports to the NM.
The 62COA works in the same way as the 61COA, except that the 62COA uses
Raman amplifier while the 61COA uses EDFA amplifier.
9.4.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the 61COA is shown in Figure 9-14.
8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11
1. ID DIP switch 2. Running indicator 3. Alarm indicator 4. RS232-1

5. RS232-2 6. MONITOR-1 7. MONITOR-2 8. IN optical port
9. OUT optical port 10. Power switch 11. –48 V power interface
Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA
The front panel of the 62COA is shown in Figure 9-15.
1. SC/PC optical interface 2. E2000 optical interface 3. Air filter

4. Fan board 5. RJ-45 6 RS232-1
7 RS232-2 8. DIP switch (5–8 bits) 9. DIP switch (1–4 bits)
10. Power input interface 11. Power switch
Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA
1. Indicators
The indicators of the 61COA/62 COA are described in Table 9-11.
9-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA

ALM (Red) The ALM is constantly on and the Memory self-check error
RUN is off
Flashing 3 times every other second Critical alarm
Flashing twice every other second Major alarm
Flashing once every other second Minor alarm
RUN Flashing once every 2 seconds Normal (in service)

(Green)
Flashing once every 4 seconds Database protected mode;
communication with the SCC
interrupted
Flashing 5 times every second Program startup/load
2. Interfaces
Optical interface
There is one pair of SC/PC optical interface on the front panel of the 61COA for
inputting/outputting optical signals.
The input optical interface of the 62COA is of E2000 type, and the output optical
interface is of SC type. The following figure shows the flange and optical fiber
connector used by the input port on the 62COA board.
Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector
Caution:
The E2000 fiber jumper integrates a specially designed optical cap. Do not remove
this optical cap during fiber connection. Just insert the fiber connector (with the optical
cap) into the E2000 flange.
RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port

Control & communication interface. It communicates with the SCC, reports alarms
9-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
and performance events.
Note:
The RS-232-1 port on the COA is connected with the F&f port on the subrack through
the serial control cable to realize communication with the SCC.
When there are several COAs on the same station, the RS-232-2 port is employed.
Use serial cable to connect the RS-232-2 of No. 1 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 2
COA, and then the RS-232-2 of No. 2 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 3 COA. The ports
are all connected in this way. All the COAs communicate with the SCC unit on the
subrack through the RS-232-1 port of No.1 COA, as shown in Figure 9-17.
F&f RS232-1 RS232-2 RS232-1 RS232-2
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
SCC GND GND
Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
COA COA
Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC
Note:
To concatenate the COAs, the last four digits of the DIP switch on the panel should be
switched to different IDs to identify the COAs. The maximum number of concatenated
subracks of the OptiX OSN 3500 is 2.
MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface
MONITOR-1 and MONITOR-2 serve as the alarm output port when the 61COA is
used alone. The relation between the output alarm and the interface pin is illustrated in
Table 9-12.
Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin

MONITOR-1 pin MONITOR-2 pin Definition
number number
1, 6 1, 6 EDFA’s input optical power is too low
2, 7 2, 7 Working temperature of the pump laser is

over threshold
3, 8 3, 8 Cool current of pump laser is over

threshold
9-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
MONITOR-1 pin MONITOR-2 pin Definition

number number
4, 9 4, 9 Environment temperature is over
threshold
5 5 Digital ground
RJ-45 Ethernet interface

Specially designed for the 62COA, the interface is used to connect a computer to load
the board software.
–48 V power interface
It inputs the –48V power from PIU board or power box on the cabinet. The voltage
range under normal working condition: –38.4 V to –57.6 V.
DIP switch
The DIP switch of the 61COA is located on the lower left corner of the panel. It is used
to set the ID of the 61COA. When it is in the upper state, it is OFF. When it is in the
lower state, it is ON. The SCC identifies and communicates with 61COAs with
different IDs.
The DIP switch of the 62COA is used for setting the ID of 62COA and the type of fiber.
For each bit of the 8-bit DIP switch (bit 8 to bit 1 from left to right), up position means 0
and down position means 1. The bits 1–4 show the board ID, and indicate the ID
number ranging from 20 to 35. Normally the ID number ranges from 20 to 27. The fifth
bit indicates the type of fiber. “0" indicates G.652 fiber, and “1” indicates G.655 fiber.
9.4.5 Installation
The COA adopts case-shape design, not occupying any slot in the subrack. In the
OptiX cabinet, a special bracket is designed to hold the 61COA. The 62COA is
installed directly in the cabinet with the mounting ears.
1. Installation of the 61COA

The bracket is fixed on the crossbars on both sides of the cabinet. The 61COA is
pushed into the brackets along the guide rail and fixed. One bracket can house two
61COAs side by side with the front panel of the 61COA facing the front side of the
cabinet, as shown in Figure 9-18.
9-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet
2. Installation of the 62COA

The 62COA can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm cabinet with mounting ears and
screws. If adopting upward-wiring, the 62COA is installed at the bottom of the ETSI
cabinet (first and third floating nuts). If adopting downward-wiring mode, the 62COA is
installed in any idle place of the 2.6 m high cabinet or in the ETSI cabinet not fully
configured.
9.4.6 Version Description.
The 61COA and 62COA are the externally installed case-shape optical amplifier. Their
logic slots on the NM T2000 are slots 101 and 102. The 61COA and 62COA are
applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The OptiX
OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500 can be equipped with up to two COAs, but the OptiX
OSN 1500 can be equipped with only one COA.
Table 9-13 shows the technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA.
Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA
61COA 62COA
Dimensions (mm) 240 (L) x 190 (W) x 50 (H) 436 (L) x 294 (W) x 86 (H)
Weight (kg) 3.5 8
Power consumption (W) 10 75
Processing capability One optical signal One optical signal
Connector SC/PC SC/PC and E2000
Operating wavelength 1550 1550.12

(nm)
Input optical power range NA –39 to –20 (2.5 Gbit/s signal

(dBm) without FEC)
9-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
61COA 62COA
Output optical power +14/+17 NA
(dBm)
Pump wavelength (nm) NA 1451.2
Max, on/off gain (dB) NA >15 (applied to G.652 fiber)
Noise figure (dB) NA <–1.5
9-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.5 DCU
The DCU is the dispersion compensation board. It can compensate for the optical
signal dispersion accumulated during transmission in the 10 Gbit/s system. In addition,
it compresses the optical signal and works with the booster amplifier to achieve long
distance optical transmission.
The DCU can be seated in slots 1–8 and slots 11–17 of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
and it is only used in the 10 Gbit/s system.
9.5.1 Functionality
Use chirp grating to compensate for the optical dispersion and compress the pulse
signal for signal recovery.
Make dispersion compensation to two channels of optical signals simultaneously,
with the compensation being 1020 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 60 km
G.652 fiber) or 1360 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 80 km G.652 fiber), or the
free combination of the two.
Work with BA and PA for long distance optical transmission.
9.5.2 Application
After long distance transmission over optical fiber, the pulse of the 10 Gbit/s signal
becomes broadened due to dispersion. The signal is distorted seriously and cannot be
received by the optical receiver normally. Thus, the DCU is needed for dispersion
compensation. Its position in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-19.
Pulse broading Pulse compressing
Long fiber
Optical Optical
transmitter BA PA DCU
receiver
1550.12 nm
1550.12 nm
Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system
Note:
The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm, so it is
required that the central wavelength of the optical signal sent from the remote optical
interface board is also 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, it is impossible to make dispersion
compensation to the optical signal. And insertion loss is very large and no optical
signal is output.
9-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.5.3 Principle
Figure 9-20 shows the functional block diagram of the DCU.
Input
Chirp grating
IN
Coupler
OUT
Output Long Short

w avelength w avelength
Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU
The 10 Gbit/s optical signal is sent into IN interface of the coupler, and then to the chirp
grating through the single port of the coupler after an attenuation of 3 dB.
For spectrum components with different wavelengths, the chirp grating has different
reflection positions. The reflection position for short wavelength components is at the
inner part of the grating, which means a longer transport distance. While that for long
wavelength components is at the external part of the grating, which means a shorter
transport distance. Additionally, the delay of signals with different frequencies is
different. As a result, the signals reflected back by the grating is “compressed”, thus
achieving the compensation effect.
The signal after compensation will be returned to the coupler and then sent out from
the OUT interface after an attenuation of 3 dB. These pulse-compressed optical
signals can be received by receiver and transmitted for a long distance over optical
fiber.
9.5.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the DCU is shown in Figure 9-21.
9-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
DCU
OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2
DCU
Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU
1. Indicators
None
2. Interfaces
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU for receiving
and transmitting two 10 Gbit/s optical signals. Using pluggable optical module is easy
for maintenance.
9-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The DCU board has two versions: N1 and N2. The DCU is only applicable to the OptiX
OSN 3500.
The N2 version DCU, as a low insertion loss DCU, brings the insertion loss 3-5 dB
less than what the N1 version DCU brings.
Caution:
When replacing the N1 version DCU with an N2 version DCU, add an attenuator to
avoid optical power overload.

The technical parameters of the DCU are shown in Table 9-14.
Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU
Processing capability Dispersion compensation for 2 x STM-64 optical

signals
Connector LC
Dimensions (mm) H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) W
Weight (kg) 0.42
Central wavelength (nm) 1550.12 ±0.05
–0.5 dB bandwidth (nm) >0.4
Dispersion compensation (ps/nm) 1020 (60 km)

1360 (80 km)
Insertion loss (dB) <8.3 <3

Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%

9-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI
The AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI are the system auxiliary interface board, providing the
system with various auxiliary interfaces, management interfaces, central backup of
the +3.3 V board power supply, orderwire interface and broadcast data interface.
The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI has one version Q1,
the EOW has one version R1. Table 9-15 shows their slots in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
Board Function Product Slot
N1AUX System auxiliary interface OptiX OSN 3500 Slot 37
board
Q1SAP System auxiliary processing OptiX OSN 2500 Slot 14

board OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Q1SEI The extended signal interface OptiX OSN 2500 Auxiliary

board, providing the system OptiX OSN 2500 REG interface area
with various auxiliary interfaces
and management interfaces
R1EOW Orderwire board, providing OptiX OSN 1500 Slot 9

orderwire interface and
broadcast data interface
R1/R2AUX System auxiliary interface OptiX OSN 1500 Slot 10

board
9.6.1 Functionality
Board N1AUX R1/R2AUX R1EOW Q1SAP Q1SEI
Function
Management Provide an Provide an — Provide a ETH Provide an
interface X.25-compliant X.25-complia NM interface. X.25-compliantO
OAM interface; ntOAM/F&f AM interface;
Provide an F&f interface; Provide an F&f
serial interface; Provide a serial interface.
Provide a ETH ETH NM
NM interface ; interface.
Provide a EXT
interface to
manage
extended
subracks.
9-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function
Auxiliary Provide Serial — Provide Serial — Provide Serial
interface 1–4 broadcast 1–4 1–4 broadcast
data interfaces; broadcast data interfaces;
Provide F1 data Provide F1
codirectional interfaces; codirectional
data interface Provide F1 data interface (64
(64 kbit/s) . codirectional kbit/s).
data interface
(64 kbit/s),
which also
serves as the
OAM
interface.
Clock interface Provide two Provide two — — Provide two BITS

2.048 MHz BITS BITS clock clock
clock input/output input/output
input/output interfaces interfaces with
interfaces; with impedance being
Provide two impedance 120 Ω.
2.048 Mbit/s being 120 Ω. Provide two BITS
BITS clock clock
input/output input/output
interfaces . interfaces with
impedance being
75 Ω.
House- Provide Provide — Support Provide

keeping alarm house-keeping house-keepi house-keeping house-keeping
interface alarm interface ng alarm alarm input, alarm interface
for 16 inputs and interface for output, and output for 8 inputs and 4
4 outputs; three inputs concatenation. outputs;
Provide a output and one Provide a output
alarms output. alarms
concatenating concatenating
interface for 4 interface for 4
output alarms. output alarms.
Cabinet alarm Provide a four — — Drive and Provide a four

indicator cabinet alarms concatenate four cabinet alarms
output interface; cabinet indicator output interface;
Provide a four signals. Provide a four
input cabinet input cabinet
alarms alarms
concatenating concatenating
interface. interface.
9-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function
Orderwire Provide one — Provide one — Provide one
interface orderwire orderwire orderwire
interface. interface. interface.
Provide two off Provide two off
network network signaling
signaling interface.
interface. Provide two off
Provide two off network audio
network audio interface.
interface.
Commissionin Provide one Provide one — Provide one —

g interface commissioning commissioni commissioning
interface (COM). ng interface interface (COM).
(COM).
Internal Support Support — Support —

communicatio communication communicati communication
n between boards on between between boards
on one subrack. boards on on one subrack.
one subrack.
Orderwire — — Process E1, Process E1, E2, —

processing E2, F1, Serial F1, Serial 1–4
1–4 bytes. bytes.
Power backup Monitor two –48 V subrack — Monitor two –48 V —

and detection power supplies and detect subrack power
over-voltage (–72 V) and supplies and
undervoltage; detect
Provide centralized backup of over-voltage (–72
+3.3 V board power (secondary V) and
power supply 1:N protection). undervoltage
Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and . Provide

under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V centralized
standby power supply. backup of +3.3 V
board power
The power is 80 w. (secondary power
supply 1:N
protection).
The power is 1000
w.
Detect
over-voltage (3.8
V) and
under-voltage (3.1
V) for 3.3 V
standby power
supply.
9-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function
Audio alarm Support audio Support — Support audio —
alarm and alarm audio alarm alarm and alarm
cut-up. and alarm cut-up.
cut-up.
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX

The AUX consists of communication module, interface module and power module.
Figure 9-22 shows its functional block diagram.
NM interface
Communica-
Auxiliary Interface tion Inter-board
interface module module communication interface
+3.3 V
Power (standby power
+3.3 V
-48 V supply for each
module +2.7 V
board)
+5 V
Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Provide the NM interface for active/standby SCCs, OAM interface for remote
maintenance, and interfaces for inter-board communication.
2. Interface Module
Provide various auxiliary interfaces, such as F&f, OAM, F1 and clock input/output.
The N1 AUX and R1/R2 AUX provide different auxiliary interfaces. For details, see
section 9.6.1.
3. Power Module
Provide the AUX with working power, and other boards on the subrack with +3.3 V
centralized backup power.
9.6.3 Principle of EOW
Figure 9-23 shows the functional block diagram of the EOW.
9-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Overhead
processing unit
SCC
unit
PHONE
Broadcasting
S1 data interface
S2
S3 and orderwire Ringing current
S4 processing unit generating,
resetting, timing
unit
Front Backplane
panel
Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW
The overhead processing module processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 1–4 bytes. The
position of each overhead byte in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 9-24.
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3 Serial 1 Serial2
AU_PTR
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 Serial 4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12 Serial3
S1 M1 E2
Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
9.6.4 Principle of SAP

Figure 9-25 shows the functional block diagram of the SAP.
9-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 orderwire phone
Overhead 2 SDH NNI phones

processing 1 F1
module
4 S1-S4
13 communications between boards

ETH System
2 NM itnerfaces
communication
COM module 2 protocol bus
8 alarm inputs/4 alarm outputs

and concatenation
Cabinet indicator activating
Power and concatenation
monitoring
2 -48V power monitoring
module
3.3V backup power monitoring
Front Backplane
panel
Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP
1. Overhead Processing Module

It processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 1–4 bytes. Figure 9-24 shows the position of each
orderwire byte in the SDH frame.
2. System Communication Module

It implements communication between 13 boards and provides a bus for transmitting
MSP, SNCP, TPS protection switching and clock protocol.
3. Power Monitoring Module

It detects two –48 V power supplies and 3.3 V backup power supply, and implements
eight house-keeping alarm inputs and four house-keeping alarm outputs and their
concatenation, and the drive and concatenation of four cabinet indicators.
9.6.5 Principle of SEI
Figure 9-26 shows the functional block diagram of the SEI.
9-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Backplane
Protection and filtering circuits

防护和滤波电路
Front panel
Indicator output
Indicator concatenation
Clock output interface

Outgoing subnet voice
Clock input interface

House-keeping alarm output
House-keeping alarm output

Orderwire interface
House-keeping alarm concatenation
House-keeping alarm input
Series 1
Series 2
Series 3
Series 4
OAM
F&f
F1
Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI
The SEI provides a protect and filter circuit. The SEI accesses and sends various
control and management signals to the CXL and SAP for processing.
9.6.6 Front Panel
1. N1AUX
There is an indicator on the N1AUX front panel to show its working status, as
Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX
STAT (red and On, green The +3.3 V power supply is normal.
green)
On, red The +3.3 V power supply is abnormal, and the AUX
board is fed with the backup power.
Off Both the +3.3 V working power and the backup

power fail, and the board is fed with no power.
The interfaces of the N1AUX are described in Table 9-17.
9-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX

Front panel Interface Description Interface
type
CLKO1 75 Ω clock output interface 1 SMB
CLKO2 75 Ω clock output interface 2 SMB

STAT
CLKO1
CLK1 120 Ω clock interface 1 RJ-45
CLKI1
CLKO2
CLKI2
REV Reserved RJ-45
F&f F&f interface RJ-45

CLK1 CLK2
F1 F1 interface RJ-45
REV ETH
PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-45
F&f COM
V1 Off network audio interface 1 RJ-45
F1 EXT
V2 Off network audio interface 2 RJ-45
PHONE LAMP1 OAM OAM interface RJ-45
V1 LAMP2 S1 Serial 1 RJ-45
V2 ALMO1 S2 Serial 2 RJ-45
OAM ALMO2 S3 Serial 3 RJ-45
S4 Serial 4 RJ-45
S1 ALMI1
CLKI1 75 Ω clock input interface 1 SMB
S2 ALMI2
CLKI2 75 Ω clock input interface 2 SMB
S3 ALMI3
CLK2 120 Ω clock interface 2 RJ-45
S4 ALMI4
ETH NM interface RJ-45
COM COM commissioning interface RJ-45
EXT Extended subrack interface RJ-45
LAMP1 Cabinet indicator output interface RJ-45
LAMP2 Input cabinet indicator RJ-45

concatenating interface
ALMO1 House-keeping alarm RJ-45

concatenating interface
ALMO2 1–4 house-keeping alarm output RJ-45

interface
ALMI1 1–4 house-keeping alarm input RJ-45

interface

interface
9-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Front panel Interface Description Interface

type
interface

interface
Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface

Front view Pin No. Description
1 Negative receiving end
2 Positive receiving end
3 Ground
4 Negative transmission end

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Positive data transmission end
6 Ground
7 and 8 Not defined.
Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface

1 Positive data transmission end
2 Negative transmission end
3 Positive receiving end
4 Not defined.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Not defined.
6 Negative receiving end
7 and 8 Not defined.
Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface

4 RS-232 receiving end
5 Ground
8 RS-232 transmission end
1, 2, 3, 6 and 7 Not defined.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface

4 Signal 1
5 Signal 2
1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 8 Not defined.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface

1 The positive of critical alarm signal
2 The negative of cirtical alarm signal
3 The positivie of major alarm signal
4 The positive of power indicator signal

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 The negative of power indicator signal
6 The negative of major alarm signal
7 The positive of minor alarm signal
8 The negative of minor alarm signal
Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface

1 The positive of critical alarm output signal
2 The negative of cirtical alarm output signal
3 The positivie of major alarm output signal
4 The positive of alarm 1 output signal

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 The negative of alarm 1 output signal
6 The negative of major alarm output signal
7 The positive of alarm 2 output signal
8 The negative of alarm 2 output signal
9-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface

1 Request to send
2 Data terminal ready
3 Transmit data
4 GND
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 GND
6 Receive data
7 Data set ready
8 Ready to recieve
Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface

1 The positive of RS-422 data transmission
2 The negative of RS-422 data transmission
3 The positivie of RS-422 data recieving
4 RS-232 data recieving

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Ground
6 The negative of RS-422 data recieving
7 Not defined.
8 RS-232 data transmission
Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface

1 Alarm input 1
2 The ground of alarm input 1
3 Alarm input 2
4 Alarm input 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 Alarm input 4
9-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

1 Alarm input 5
3 Alarm input 6
4 Alarm input 7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 Alarm input 8

1 Alarm input 9
3 Alarm input 10
4 Alarm input 11
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 Alarm input 12

1 Alarm input 13
3 Alarm input 14
4 Alarm input 15
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 Alarm input 16
9-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. R1/R2AUX
There is no indicator on the R1/R2AUX front panel.
The interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel are described in Table 9-30.
Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel
Interface Description Interface type
ETH NM interface RJ-45
COM Commissioning interface RJ-45
CLK 120 Ω external clock input/output RJ-45

interface
ALM House-keeping alarm input/output RJ-45

interface
OAM/F&f NM and management serial interface RJ-45
3. EOW
There are two indicators on the EOW front panel as described in Table 9-31.
Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW
green)
On, green The board hardware fails.


successfully.
On for 100ms and off for The board software or software for
100ms alternatively, green FPGA is being uploaded.
On for 300ms and off for The board software is being initialized,
300ms alternatively, green and is in BIOS boot stage.

FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or
in initializing.
9-42
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
The interfaces on the EOW front panel are described in Table 9-32.
Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW
Interface Description Interface type
PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-11
S1 Broadcast data interface S1 RJ-45
4. SAP
There are indicators on the SAP front panel. For their description, see Table 9-31.
The interfaces on the SAP front panel are described in Table 9-33.
Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP
Interface Description
COM Commissioning interface
ETH NM interface
5. SEI
There is no indicator on the Q1SEI front panel.
The interfaces on the SEI front panel are described in Table 9-34.
Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI
Interface Description Interface Interface Description Interface
type type
ALMO1 4 house-keeping RJ-45 ALM1 4 house-keeping RJ-45
alarms output alarms input
interface interface
ALMO2 4 output RJ-45 ALM2 4 house-keeping RJ-45

house-keeping alarms input
alarms interface
concatenating
interface
9-43
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Interface Description Interface Interface Description Interface

type type
LAMP1 4 cabinet alarm RJ-45 S1 Serial 1 RJ-45
indicators output
interface
LAMP2 4 input cabinet alarm RJ-45 S2 Serial 2 RJ-45

indicators
concatenating
interface
OAM OAM interface RJ-45 S3 Serial 3 RJ-45
F1 F1 interface RJ-45 S4 Serial 4 RJ-45
F&f F&f interface RJ-45 V1 Off network audio RJ-45

interface 1
PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-45 V2 Off network audio RJ-45

interface 2
CLK1 120 Ω clock 1 RJ-45 18 Reserved RJ-45
CLK2 120 Ω clock 2 RJ-45 20 Reserved RJ-45
CLKO1 75 Ω clock output 1 SMB CLKO2 75 Ω clock output 2 SMB
CLK1 75 Ω clock input 1 SMB CLK2 75 Ω clock input 2 SMB
ALMO1 ALMO2 LAMP1 LAMP2 OAM F1 F&f PHONE CLK1 CLK2
CLKO1 CLKO2 CLKI1 CLKI2
ALM1 ALM2 S1 S2 S3 S4 V1 V2
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation

1. House-keeping alarm concatenation
Figure 9-27 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple
OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 9-28 shows the connection of alarm input and output
of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. Connect the alarm output interface to
the alarm concatenation interface downstream. Make the connections one by one
until the alarm output is connected to the centralized alarm system.
9-44
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Subrack 1 Subrack 3
ALMO1 ALMO1
ALMO2 ALMO2
Centralized
alarm system ALMI1 ALMI1
Subrack 2 Subrack 4
ALMO1 ALMO1
ALMO2 ALMO2
ALMI1 ALMI1
Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500)
To the
centralized
alarm system
ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO1 ALMO2
Subrack 1 Subrack 3
ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO1 ALMO2
Subrack 2 Subrack 4
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Figure 9-28 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 2500)
2. Cabinet alarm indicator connection

The connection of the four OptiX OSN 3500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in
Figure 9-29. The connection of the four OptiX OSN 2500 cabinet alarm indicators is
shown in Figure 9-30. Connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 2
to the concatenated cabinet alarm indicator input of subrack 1, and then connect the
cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 1 to the indicator interface on the top
of the cabinet.
9-45
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
4 cabinet
alarm indicators
Cabinet indicator
subrack 1
LAMP1
LAMP2
subrack 2
LAMP1
LAMP2
Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500)
Cabinet
indicators
LAMP1 LAMP2
Subrack 2
LAMP1 LAMP2
Subrack 1
Cabinet
Figure 9-30 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 2500)
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper

The jumper J9 at the lower right part of the N1AUX board is used to set the OptiX OSN
3500 as the main subrack or extended subrack, as shown in Table 9-35.
Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting
Jumper Setting Description
J9 shorted Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack.
Not shorted Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the extended subrack.

The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI have one version Q1
and the EOW has one version R1. For the application of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
in OptiX OSN products, see Table 9-15.
9-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
N1AUX R1/R2AUX EOW SAP SEI
Dimensions 262.05 (H) x 111.8 (H) x 111.8 (H) x 262.05 (H) x 290 (H) x 30
(mm) 110 (D) x 44 220 (D) x 25.4 220 (D) x 25.4 220 (D) x 25.4 (D) x 25.4
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
Weight (kg) 0.96 0.96 0.40 0.71 0.91
Power 19 19 10 20 10
consumption
(W)

condition

condition


transportation
9-47
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.7 PIU
The PIU or PIUA is a power interface board.
It functions power access, lightening protection and filtering.
The PIU has three versions: N1, Q1 and R1. The PIUA has one version R1.
The N1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28.
The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG and
seated in slots 22 and 23.
The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19.
The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.
9.7.1 Functionality
Provide lightning protection function and report the lightning protection failure
alarm.
Enhance the electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) of the system by filtering and
shielding the power supply.
Report the board in position information.
Support 1+1 hot backup protection. Any one PIU can provide power for the whole
subrack independently.
Supply the FAN board with 48 V±20% power.
The N1PIU provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as COA
and HUB. The Q1PIU and R2PIU provide one 50 W power interface for external
devices such as COA and HUB. The R1PIU does not provide external power
interface.
The R1PIU provides a 75 Ω clock input interface and a 75 Ω clock output interface,
and protects the clock signal.
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU
Figure 9-31 shows the functional block diagram of the N1PIU and Q1PIU.
BGND Lightning
Pow er protection
access unit and Filter unit Backplane
-48V unit failure
detection
Lightning protection unit failure alarm

SCC
Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU
1. Power Access Unit

The power access unit accesses the –48/–60 V power for the system.
2. Lightning Protection Unit

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. The PIU will
9-48
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
report the failure of lightning protection unit to the SCC.
3. Filter Unit
The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal
to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment.
9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU
Figure 9-32 shows the functional block diagram of the R1PIU.
NEG(-)
NEG(-)
Lightning
protection Filter
unit unit
RTN(+) RTN(+)
Power
detection
Clock input Clock output

Clock
protection
LED indication
Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU

The power access unit accesses the –48/–60 V power for the system.

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.
3. Filter Unit
4. Power Detection
Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power
through an indicator.
5. Clock Protection
Protect the input clock signal.
9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU
Figure 9-33 shows the functional block diagram of the R2PIU.
9-49
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
External
power supply
interface
NEG(-) Lightning Filter NEG(-)
protection unit
RTN(+) unit RTN(+)
Power Fan power

detectio unit
n
LED
indication
Figure 9-33 Functional block diagram of the R2PIU

The power access unit accesses the –48 V/–60 V power for the system.

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.
3. Filter Unit
4. Power Detection
Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power
through an indicator.
5. Fan Power Unit

Provide the fan with regulated power supply.
6. External power interface unit

Provide external equipment (COA) with –48 V power. The power interface is on the
front panel.
9.7.5 Front Pane
1. N1PIU
The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-34.
9-50
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU
There are power interfaces on the N1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-37.
Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel
PWR –48 V power access interface
PS1/PS2 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB
2. Q1PIU
The Q1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-35.
Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU
9-51
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
There are power interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-38.
Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU
PWR –48 V power access interface
PWS 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB
3. R1PIU
The R1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-36.
Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIU
There is an indicator on the R1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-39.

Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU
Power indicator On, green Power input is normal.
(POWER)
Off No power input or power failure
There are interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-40.
Table 9-40 Interfaces of the Q1PIU
PWR –48 V power input interface
ClK IN 75 Ω clock input interface (SMB)
ClK OUT 75 Ω clock output interface (SMB)
4. R2PIU
The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-37.
9-52
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 9-37 Front panel of the R2PIU
The indicator on the R2PIU front panel is the same as that on the R1PIU. Refer to
Table 9-39.
There are two interfaces and one switch on the R2PIU front panel, as described in
Table 9-41.
Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel
PWR –48 V power input interface
PWS 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB.
Power switch Switch on the power by pushing the switch to the ON (1) position.
Switch off the power by pushing the switch to the OFF (0)
position.
9-53
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

The NIPIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28.
The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and
seated in slots 22 and 23.
The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19.
The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.
Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU
N1PIU Q1PIU R1PIU R2PIU
Input voltage –38.4 V to –72 –38.4 V to –72 V –38.4 V to –72 V –38.4 V to –72 V
V
Protecion tube Main loop: Main loop: Main loop: Main loop:
F7 250 V-20 250V-20A-0.003 250V-10A-0.006 250V-10A-0.006
A-0.00355 Ω 55 Ω Ω Ω
Dimensions 262.05 x 110 x 220 x 74 x 44 108 x 110 x 41.5 111.8 x 220 x

(mm) 44 25.4
Weight (kg) 1.15 1.25 1.25 1.5
Power 8 8 3 3
consumption
(W)

condition

condition


transportation
9-54
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.8 UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM), numbered GIE4805S, is a special power
supply system. It can convert 110 V/220 V AC power supply directly to –48 V DC
needed by transmission equipment, such as OptiX OSN 2500/1500. It is suitable for
telecom carriers who do not have –48 V DC power supply equipment or who require
storage batteries.
The UPM power supply system consists of a power box (from 110 V/220 V to –48 V)
and storage batteries. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W. The power box is
1U high and can be installed directly in the 19-inch or ETSI cabinet. The appearance
of the power box is shown in Figure 9-38.
5S
80
E4
GI
Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box
Note:
The UPM is displayed as a CAU board on the T2000. You can operate the CAU to
manage and maintain the UPM power system.
The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the
mains 110V/220V AC supply is interrupted, the battery module can supply power for
nearly 4 hours. Only one power box is needed to connect to storage batteries when
used with OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500. For more detailed information, refer to
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual.
9-55
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.8.1 Functionality
The OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500 needs to be configured with two power
boxes and four 12 V-40 Ah storage batteries. If the equipment does not need storage
battery, one power box is all right. Each power box is configured with two rectifier
modules and one monitoring module (standard configuration).
1. Hot Backup
The power conversion part of the UPM power supply system adopts two AC/DC
rectifier modules for hot backup, and the rectifier module can balance load during
working. If one rectifier module fails, the other will take over all the load immediately,
not affecting the service on the equipment and thus enhancing the stability of the
system.
2. Hot-Swap
In the UPM power supply system, the AC/DC rectifier module is hot-swappable. When
the faulty rectifier module is replaced, the other one is still working normally.
3. Storage Battery Protection

The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the
mains supply is interrupted, the UPM power system can switch automatically to the
storage battery, ensuring normal operation of the equipment. The battery module can
provide 40 Ah capacity.
4. Monitoring Function
The UPM power supply system integrates module monitoring and NM monitoring
functions. The monitoring module can monitor and control the rectifier module, the
parameters and status of AC/DC and the battery group in real time and report them to
the transmission NM. The battery can achieve floating charge and current limitation
management.
5. Loading Capacity
The load bearing capability of each rectifier module is designed to be 270 W.
9.8.2 Principle
The UPM power supply system is supplied by one 220 V AC mains power. The input
AC power is rectified into –48 V DC voltage by the rectifier module to provide two DC
branches and one battery branch to the users.
Under normal conditions, the rectifier module, storage battery loop and load loop work
according to pre-defined parameters or user settings and they are under control of the
monitoring module. The monitoring module monitors various statuses and data.
In case of mains supply failure, the equipment will be supplied by storage batteries
connected to the UPM power supply system. The batteries must be connected to the
UPM power supply system before mains supply failure happens. When batteries start
to discharge due to mains supply failure, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of no
mains supply. With the discharge of batteries, battery voltage starts to drop. When
battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of DC
under-voltage. When battery voltage reaches 43 V termination voltage, batteries will
initiate power disconnection protection to cut connection of batteries with equipment to
achieve automatic protection of batteries.
9-56
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
When mains supply is recovered, the UPM power supply system resumes normal
operation.
9.8.3 Front Panel
The rear view of the power box is shown in Figure 9-39.
1 2 3 4
AC100~240 RUN ALM
ALM Vout ALM Vout

RS232
5 6
1. AC input 2. Rectifier module/air outlet 3. Communication interface 4. Battery interface

5. Load 6. Load
Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box
1. Indicators
There are two indicators (ALM and Vout) on the left side of the front panel of each
rectifier module and two indicators (ALM and RUN) on the front panel of the
monitoring module.
When the power box works normally, the Vout indicators of the two rectifier modules
are on (green) and the RUN indicator of the monitoring board is flashing (green).
Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box
Module Indicator Status Description
Rectifier ALM On (red) The rectifier module is faulty.
module
Vout On (green) The output of the rectifier is normal.
Monitoring RUN Flashing (green) The power system is normal.

module
ALM On (red) The power system is faulty.
2. Interfaces
The interfaces of the power box are described in Table 9-44.
Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel
AC100–240 It is an AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220 V AC
power.
Red on/off button It is at the upper right corner of the front panel of the rectifier
module. You can enable/disable the rectifier module by
pressing the button.
9-57
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
RS-232 Through this interface the UPM power supply system can
communication communication with the SCC board of OptiX OSN products to
interface report alarms and realize remote control. (The RS-232 serial
port of one power box is connected to the F&f interface of OptiX
OSN products, the RS-232 serial port of the other power box is
connected to the ALM1 interface of the OptiX OSN products.)
Power output There are three power output interfaces on the right of the
interface power box. The one above is battery interface, through which
the power box connects to the battery input socket at the back
of the storage battery box with battery cable. The two
interfaces below are load interface. They can supply power to
OptiX OSN products through power cable.
9.8.4 Precautions
The battery input interface and load input interface shall not be mixed. Otherwise
the UPM power supply system cannot work normally.
When load is added with power on, the strict tool and personal insulation measures
must be taken to avoid accidents during operation.
Table 9-45 shows the technical parameters of the UPM.
Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM
AC input voltage range 90 V–264 V AC
AC input One channel of monophase three-wire AC power: 47

Hz–63 Hz
Rated input current ≤3.5 A
Output nominal voltage 54.0 V±0.5 V
Rated output current 10 A (two user load branches with each current not
more than 5 A)
Number of backup battery 1 group (40 Ah)

groups
Charging current of backup ≤3 A

battery
Backup battery fuse 10 A
Storage battery: DC 45±0.5 V

under-current point
Storage battery: termination 43±0.5 V

voltage point
9-58
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Storage battery: floating –54.0±0.5V
charge voltage
Regulated voltage precision ≤±1%
Non-balance of load ≤±5% (50%–100% load)

sharing
Rated efficiency of ≥80%

integrated equipment
Peak stray noise voltage ≤200 mV
Voltage drop in the power ≤500 mV

panel (20℃)
Network adjustment rate ≤±0.1%
Dimensions of a power box 438 mm x 240 mm x 44 mm
Dimensions of a storage 197 mm x 165 mm x 170 mm

battery
9.9 FAN
The OptiX OSN equipment uses the modularized fan, as shown in Figure 9-40. The
FAN is a fan control board, responsible for fan speed adjustment, fan failure detection
and failure report, as well as report of the fan not-in-position alarm.
The fan has two versions N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500
and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500.
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack uses three fan boxes.
The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack uses two fan boxes.
The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack uses one fan box.
Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)
9-59
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.9.1 Functionality
The fan boxes support hot swapping.
Power supplies for N1 fan boxes are for mutual backup.
Provide intelligent fan speed adjustment, which is reflected in the following
aspects:
− Adjust the fan speed automatically
− When one fan goes faulty, others operate at their full speeds
− When the speed-adjusting signal is not normal, control the fans to operate at
their full speeds.
Detect fan failure.
Reports alarms and online information of fans.
Provide an indicator on front panel to indicate the running status.
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN
Figure 9-41 shows the functional block diagram of the N1FAN.
Status signal
Speed adjusting signal Pow er
Status ouput supply
FAN Fan
Alarm output
External pow er ground 1
Pow er supply Pow er ground
External pow er supply 1

Fan pow er board
External pow er supply 2
Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN
1. Fan Power Board

The FAN provides the fans with drive voltage.
2. Fan Control Board

The value of the drive voltage is controlled by the fan speed-adjusting signal for
different rotating speeds. The fan control board also detects the failure of the fans, fan
power board and itself. At fault occurrence, it will report alarm to the SCC for sending
command to make the other two fans operate at their full speeds. The FAN also
receives the turn-off command in case of low temperature and turn off the fans. The
following items involves in the detection by the fan control board: failure of the fan
power board, fault of the speed-adjusting signal, fan failure, and fan in-position.
9-60
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN

Figure 9-42 shows the functional block diagram of the R1FAN.
－ 48 V 1
GND GND
－ 48 V 2
Power
GND1 access Delay
Fan
unit start unit
GND2 －48 V －48 V
－ 48 V
GND
Fan alarm
signals
Status
Voltage detection
drop unit unit
－48 V GND
Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN

Provide –48 V power for the FAN.
2. Status Detection Unit

Detect the status of the FAN. It reports the fan failure to the CXL and drive the
corresponding alarm indicator when any of the six fans stops.
9.9.4 Front Panel
1. N1FAN
There is an indicator on the front panel of the FAN to show its working status, as
Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN
Indicator Color Description
STATE (red, yellow On, green The fan operates normally.
and green)
On, red The fan, fan power board or fan control board is
abnormal.
On, yellow The fan is turned off due to low temperature.
2. R1FAN
The R1FAN front panel is shown in Figure 9-43.
9-61
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
FAN
RUN
ALM
Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN
The indicators on the R1FAN front panel are described in Table 9-47.
Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN
Indicator Color Description
RUN On, green The board operates normally.
Off, green The board is not powered.
ALM On, red A fan stops.
Off, red The fans operate normally.

The FAN has two versions: N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN
3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN
N1FAN R1FAN
Dimensions (mm) 50.8 x 120 x 120 120 x 25.4 x 220
Weight (kg) 1.50 1.01
Power consumption 15 (the input voltage is 48 20 (the input voltage is 48 V)

(W) (Note) V)
Working voltage –48 V±20% DC
9-62
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
N1FAN R1FAN



Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.
9-63
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual 10 Cables
10 Cables
This chapter describes the cables in the following aspects: cable classification, cable
structure, connector, and pin assignment. Cables used by the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 include:
Fiber jumper
Power cable and grounding cable
Alarm cable
Management cable
Clock cable
Signal cable
10.1 Fiber Jumper

10.1.1 Classification
The fiber jumpers used by the OptiX OSN 3500 are classified as shown in Table
10-1.
10-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper

Usage Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable Length
Optical fiber LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm SLM 6 m, 10 m, 20 m,
connecting OSN optical fiber 30 m, 50 m
equipment to the
ODF or other 2 mm MLM 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20
equipment optical fiber m, 30 m, 50 m
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,

optical fiber 30 m, 50 m
2 mm MLM 10 m, 20 m, 30 m,
optical fiber 50 m
SC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20

optical fiber m, 30 m, 50 m, 80
m
Optical fiber LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm SLM 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m,

connecting OSN optical fiber 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
equipments
2 mm MLM 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20
optical fiber m, 30 m
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm SLM 6 m, 10 m, 20 m,

LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,

LC/PC E2000/APC 2 mm SLM NA

optical fiber
Select fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey. The OptiX
OSN 3500/2500/1500 uses LC/PC fiber connector (SC/PC for the N2OU08 board).
The “IN” interface on the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector.
Caution:
Multi-transverse mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to
multi-mode fiber; the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode optical
transmitting module needs to be connected to single-mode fiber.
10.1.2 Connector
Most optical interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/2500 board front panel are of
LC/PC type, as shown in Figure 10-1. The N2OU08 board provides SC/PC optical
10-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
interface. The “IN” interface of the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC

connector, as shown in Figure 10-4.
On the client-side ODF, the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface is used. The matched
FC/PC and SC/PC connectors are shown in Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-2
respectively. The four types of connector are described in Table 10-2.
Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector
Internal fiber connector Description
LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished
E2000/APC Connector with dust-proof cover/protruding polished (8°)
FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished
1. LC/PC Optical Interface
The appearance of the LC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface
The plugging/unplugging of LC/PC optical interface only needs axial operation

instead of rotation.
When inserting the fiber jumper with LC/PC connector, be careful to align the head of
the fiber jumper with the optical interface on the optical board and push in the fiber
with proper strength. When pulling it out, press the clip first, then push fiber
connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector.
2. SC/PC Optical Interface
The appearance of the SC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-2.
10-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface
3. FC/PC Optical Interface
The appearance of the FC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface
4. E2000/APC Optical Interface
The appearance of the E2000/APC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-4.
10-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables are listed in
Table 10-3.
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables
Cabinet
Cabinet –48V/BGND/PGND Cabinet –48V/BGND/PGND
–48V/BGND/PGND
power cable power cable
power cable
Cabinet door grounding Cabinet door grounding

_
cable cable
Equipment –48 V/-60

Subrack power cable Subrack power cable V power cable/PGND
power cable
HUB/COA power cable HUB/COA power cable _
_ UPM power cable UPM power cable
10.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable
–48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used for supplying power to the
equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power
distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end
connects to the power distribution box at the cabinet top.
1. Structure
The structure of the –48 V cabinet power cable/BGND power cable is shown in
Figure 10-5. The PGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-6.
10-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1 2
1. Naked connector 2. Naked connector-OT type 3. Cable tie

Figure 10-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable
1. Naked connector-OT type 2. Cable tie 3. Naked connector

4. Heat-shrink tube 5. Main tag 6. Wire
7. Heat-shrink tube
Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable
2. Pin Assignment
None
3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
–48 V cabinet Connector 2 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin
power cable plating-naked ring terminal
Connector 1 Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-length 24

mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and

bllue-85A
10-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
Cabinet Connector 2 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin
BGND plating-naked ring terminal
grounding
cable Connector 1 Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-24 mm-inserted
12 mm deep-80A-green
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and

black-85A
Cabinet Connector 1 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin

PGND plating-naked ring terminal
grounding
cable Connector 3 Naked crimping connector-JG2-16 mm2-M6-95A-tin
plating
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-yellow and

green-85A
Fireproof level CM
Length 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable
The cabinet door grounding cable grounds the front door, rear door and side panels.
This cable is installed before delivery.
1. Structure
The structure of the cabinet door grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-7.
1. Naked connector--OT6-6 2. Heat-shrink tube 3. Main tag

Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
2. Pin Assignment
None
10-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-6mm2-M6-tin
plating-insulated ring terminal-12~10AWG
Cable Model Wire-600 V-UL1015-10AWG-50A-yellow and green
Fireproof level CM
Length 350 mm
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable
The subrack power cable connects the power distribution box at the cabinet top and
the PIU board on the subrack, leading the –48 V power supply from the top of the
cabinet to subrack. This cable is installed before delivery.
1. Structure
The structure of the subrack power cable is shown in Figure 10-8.
1. Cable connector 2. Main tag 3. Cable tie 4. Tag 5. Common connector

Figure 10-8 Structure of the subrack power cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the subrack power cable is shown in Table 10-4.
Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable
Cable connector Bare connector Relation Core color
X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to X2 Blue (–48 V power)
X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to X3 Black (power ground)
10-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Parameter
Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female
Naked connector X2/X3 Single cord end terminal-4 mm2-20A-insertion depth

10mm-gray
Cable Model Power cable-600 V-0 mm2-12AWG-balck (the core is

blue and black)-41A
Number of 2
cores
Fireproof level CM
Color Blue or black
Length 2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm
10.2.4 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable
The –48 V/–60 V power cable and grounding cable connects –48 V/–60 V power
supply to the PIU board of the OptiX OSN 1500 to access –48 V/–60 V power to the
equipment.
1. Structure
The structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable is shown in Figure 10-9 and that of the
PGND grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-10.
A3
A
A2
A1
Figure 10-9 Structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable
10-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Bare connector-OT type 2. Cable tie 3. Bare connector 4. Heat-shrink tube

5. Main tag 6. Wire 7. Heat-shrink tube
Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable is shown in Table 10-5.
Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable
Cable connector Cable Core color
A1 W1 Blue (–48 V/–60 power)
A3 W2 Black (power ground)
–48 V/–60 V power cable PGND grounding cable
Cable connector Cable connector-D Bare
type-3PIN-female connector-OT-6mm2-M4-tin
plating-round insulated
conennctor-12 to 10AWG
Bare
connector-OT-6mm2-M8-tin
plating-round insulated
conennctor-12 to 10AWG
10-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
–48 V/–60 V power cable PGND grounding cable

Cable Model Wire-300 Wire-600
V-16AWG-black(the core is V-0mm2-10AWG-yellow/green-
blue and black)-13A 50A
Number of 2 1
cores
Fireproof CM CM
level
Color Blue and black Yellow and green
Length 15 m, 30 m 15 m, 30 m
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable
The OptiX OSN 3500/2500 PIU board can supply power to external equipment (such
as COA or HUB). The HUB/COA power cable connects power port on the PIU and
the power port of external equipment.
Both ends of the HUB/COA power cable use 4PIN connector, with one end
connected to the PIU board and the other end to the power port of external
equipment (HUB or COA).
1. Structure
The structure of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Figure 10-11.

1
A-A A 3
B
3 1 W1
4 2 X1
A 2
W2 X3
X2
W1.1
W1
B W1.2 X3
W2.1
W2
W2.2
1. Common connector-female 2. Plug-4PIN 3. Main tag

A-A. Sectional view in A direction
Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable
10-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Table 10-6.
Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable
Connector X1, X2 Cable W1, W2 Color Connector X3
X1.1 W1.1 Brown X3.1
X2.1 W2.1
X1.3 W1.2 Black X3.3
X2.3 W2.2
Item Description
Connector X3 Common plug-4 PIN-double rows/4.20 mm
Connector X1/X2 Common terminal-female-4PIN-18/26AWG-13.7 mm in length
W1/W2 cable model Twisted pair-0Ω-UL2464-0.64mm-22AWG-1 pair-black
Number of cores 2
Fireproof level CM
Color Black
Length 1800 mm
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable
1. Structure
The structure of the power cable connecting UPM to the OptiX OSN 2500/1500 is
shown in Figure 10-12.
A
B
A1 A B 1
A2 2
A3
X1 X2
Figure 10-12 Structure of the subrack power cable
10-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the UPM power cable is shown in Table 10-7.
Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable
Cable Cable Cable connector X2 Core color
connector X1
A1 W1 1 Blue (–48 V/–60 V
power)
A3 W2 2 Black (power ground)
Item Parameter
Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D-spin-female (2 female, 1 male)
Common connector X2 Common terminal-2PIN-single row
Cable Model Power cable-300 V-1.31 mm2-16AWG-black (the core is

blue and black)-13A
Number of 2
cores
Fireproof level CM
Color The color of the core is blue or black
Length 2500 mm
10-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
10.3 Alarm Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cables are listed in:
Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable
Cabinet indicator cable Cabinet indicator cable _
Indicator/Alarm Indicator/Alarm concatenating _

concatenating cable between cable between OSN subracks
OSN subracks
Alarm concatenating cable Alarm concatenating cable _

between OSN subrack and between OSN subrack and
other subrack other subrack
Housekeeping alarm Housekeeping alarm Housekeeping alarm

input/output cable input/output cable input/output cable
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable
The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX board on the subrack to the
cabinet indicator, leading out the indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet
indicator.
1. Structure
The structure of the cabinet indicator is shown in Figure 10-13.
A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction

Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable is shown in Table 10-9.
10-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable

Connector X1 Connector Color Relationship Function Label
X2,/X3/ X4/ X5 print
X1.4 X2.2 White Pair Critical Green
alarm
X1.5 X2.1 Green Ground
X1.1 X3.2 White Pair Major Red

alarm
X1.2 X3.1 Blue ground
X1.3 X4.2 White Pair Power Orange

indicator
X1.6 X4.1 Brown ground
X1.7 X5.2 White Pair Minor Yellow

alarm
X1.8 X5.1 Orange Ground
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Connector Common connector -2PIN-single row/2.5 mm

X2/X3/X4/X5
Cable model Twisted pair cable-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof level CM
Core diameter 0.5 mm
Length 2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm
10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks
The indicator/alarm concatenating cables between subracks respectively

concatenates indicator and alarm signals of the OSN subracks in one cabinet or
different cabinet. Both ends of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, with one end
connected to LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of one subrack and the other end to
LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of another subrack.
10-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Structure
The structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is

shown in Figure 10-14.
1. Network port 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A

connector – RJ-45 direction
Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN

subracks is shown in Table 10-10.
Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks
Connector Connector Relationship Alarm output Indicator
X1 X2 function
X1.1 X2.1 Pair EMERGENCY ALARM + YALMP
X1.2 X2.2 EMERGENCY ALARM - YALMN
X1.3 X2.3 Pair MAIN ALARM + GRUNP
X1.6 X2.6 MAIN ALARM - GRUNN
X1.4 X2.4 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 1+ RALMP
X1.5 X2.5 AUXILIARY ALARM 1- RALMN
X1.7 X2.7 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 2+ WALMP
X1.8 X2.8 AUXILIARY ALARM 2- WALMN
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE

430U
Number of cores 8
10-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
Fireproof level CM
Length 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack
The alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is used to
concatenate the signals output/input from/to the OptiX OSN equipment and non
OSN series transmission equipment (such as OptiX 2500+, OptiX OSN 9500) of
Huawei. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to ALMO1 or
ALMO2 interface of the subrack and the other end to the alarm output or alarm
concatenating interface of other equipment.
1. Structure
The structure of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other
subrack is shown in Figure 10-15.
1. Network port 2. Main tag 3. Tag 1 4. Cable connector-D type 9

connector - RJ45 PINs-female
L: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and
other subrack is shown in Table 10-11.
10-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Relationship
X1.1 X2.7 Pair EMERGENCY ALARM +
X1.2 X2.3 EMERGENCY ALARM -
X1.3 X2.6 Pair MAIN ALARM +
X1.6 X2.1 MAIN ALARM -
X1.4 X2.8 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 1+
X1.5 X2.4 AUXILIARY ALARM 1-
X1.7 X2.9 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 2+
X1.8 X2.5 AUXILIARY ALARM 2-
Item Description
connector
ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-female
Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE

430U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof level CM
Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable
The housekeeping alarm input cable inputs the alarm signal of the external
equipment into the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and the output cable outputs the
alarm signal of the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 to the centralized alarm monitoring
equipment.
One end of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable connects to the
housekeeping alarm input/output interface through an RJ-45 connector and the other
end connects to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring
equipment. Make the connector following the on-site requirements. Each cable can
provide 4 channels transmission for housekeeping alarm.
10-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Structure
The structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable is shown in Figure 10-16.
1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A direction
Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable
2. Pin Assignment
OptiX OSN 3500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4
outputs.
OptiX OSN 2500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4
outputs.
OptiX OSN 1500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for three inputs and one
output.
So the pin assignment of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN
3500/2500 is shown in Table 10-12 and that for OptiX OSN 1500 is shown in Table
10-13.
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500
Connector Color Relationship Alarm output Alarm input
X1
X1.1 Blue Pair EMERGENCY SW_INPUT 1+
ALARM +
X1.2 White EMERGENCY SW_INPUT 1-

ALARM -
X1.3 Orange Pair MAIN ALARM + SW_INPUT 2+
X1.6 White MAIN ALARM - SW_INPUT 2-
X1.4 Green Pair AUXILIARY ALARM SW_INPUT 3+

1+
X1.5 White AUXILIARY ALARM 1- SW_INPUT 3-
10-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

X1
X1.7 Brown Pair AUXILIARY ALARM SW_INPUT 4+
2+
X1.8 White AUXILIARY ALARM 2- SW_INPUT 4-
Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500
X1
X1.1 Blue Pair - SW_INPUT 1+
X1.2 White - SW_INPUT 1-
X1.3 Orange Pair - SW_INPUT 2+
X1.4 Green Pair - SW_INPUT 3+
X1.7 Brown Pair SW_OUT1+ -
X1.8 White SW_OUT1- -
Item Description
ConnectorX1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Cable model OptiX OSN 3500/2500: Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5

mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U
OptiX OSN 1500: Twisted pair-100±15 Ω-shielded CAT5E

SFTP-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE445U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof level CM
Core diameter OptiX OSN 3500/2500: 0.5 mm
OptiX OSN 1500: 0mm
Length 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
10.4 Management Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables are listed in Table 10-14.
Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables
OAM serial port cable OAM serial port cable OAM serial port cable
Serial1–4/F&f serial port Serial1–4/F&f serial port Serial1–4/F&f serial port

cable cable cable
RS-232/422 serial port RS-232/422 serial port RS-232/422 serial port cable
cable cable
Ordinary telephone wire Ordinary telephone wire Ordinary telephone wire
COA concatenating cable COA concatenating COA concatenating cable

cable
Straight through cable Straight through cable Straight through cable
Crossover cable Crossover cable Crossover cable
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable
The OAM serial port cable is used for management and remote maintenance of the
OptiX OSN 3500. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the
OAM interface. The other end uses DB25 connector, connected to the laptop
computer, serial NM or modem.
1. Structure
The structure of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-17
1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag 3. Cable connector-DB25 male

B-B. Sectional view in B direction
Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
10-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Table 10-15.
Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function
X1.2 X2.20 Single DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
X1.3 X2.2 Single TD (Transmit Data)
X1.6 X2.3 Single RD (Receive Data)
X1.4 X2.7 Pair SG (Signaling Ground)
X1.5
Item Description
connector
ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-25PIN-male
Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof level CM
Length 5000 mm
10.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable
The serial 1~4/F&f cable is used for:

transparent transmission of environment detection data signal
management of external devices like COA
management of the UPM
One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to serial 1–4 interfaces or
F&f serial interface, and the other end uses DB9 connector, connected to external
detection equipment or external equipment.
1. Structure
The structure of the Serial 1–S4/F&f cable is shown in Figure 10-18.
10-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag 3. Cable connector-DB9 male

B-B. Sectional view in B direction
Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the Serial 1–4/F&f cable is shown in Table 10-16.
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable
X1.1 X2.8 RS-422TX +
Pair
X1.2 X2.9 RS-422TX -
X1.3 X2.6 RS-422RX +

Pair
X1.6 X2.7 RS-422RX -
X1.4 X2.3 RS-232RX

Pair
X1.8 X2.2 RS-232TX
X1.5 X2.5 Single SG
Item Description
connector
ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male
Cable model (1) Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE

430U
(2) Twisted pair-100 Ω-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26AWG-8 cores-black
10-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
Number of 8
cores
Fireproof level CM
Length Cable (2) is 3 m and cable (1) is 15 m
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable
The RS-232/422 serial port cable is used to transmission management signaling

between different subnets. Both ends use RJ45 connector. One end is connected to
the RS-232/422 serial port, and the other end to the RS-232/422 serial port of other
NE.
1. Structure
The structure of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-19.
1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag

Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Table 10-17.
10-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable

X1.3 X2.1 Pair RX +
X1.6 X2.2 RX -
X1.1 X2.3 Pair TX +
X1.2 X2.6 TX -
X1.5 X2.5 Pair SG
X1.4 X2.8 232RX
X1.8 X2.4 Single 232TX
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof level CM
Length 15 m
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire
The telephone wire is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends use RJ-11
connector. One end is connected to the PHONE interface and the other end to the
interface of the orderwire phone.
1. Structure
The structure of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Figure 10-20.
1. Phone connector-RJ-11crystal plug 2. Main tag

Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire
10-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Table 10-18.
Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.1 X2.1 No connected
X1.3 X2.3 TIP
X1.4 X2.4 RING
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-6PIN-26 to 28AWG
Cable model Power cable-150 V-UL20251-0.08 mm2-28AWG-black-1A-2-core

telephone wire
Number of cores 2
Fireproof level CM
Length 15 m
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable
When multiple COAs are installed in the cabinet, the RS-232/422 serial port is
required to concatenate them. Both ends of the cable use DB9 connector, connected
to the RS232-1 serial port of one COA and the RS232-2 serial port of another COA.
1. Structure
The structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-21.
10-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Cable connector-DB9 male 2. Main tag

Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Table
10-19.
Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Remark
3 2 A pair
2 3
5 5 Grounding
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male
Cable model Twisted pair-100 ohm-UL2464-0.32 mm-28AWG-2P-grey
Number of cores 2 pairs
Fireproof level CM
Length 0.6 m, 2.5 m
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable
The straight through cable is used in many ways, including:

Connect the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and HUB.
Connect HUB and NM computer
Connect the Ethernet interface board and Ethernet equipment
10-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Both ends of the straight through cable use RJ-45 connector which connects the
equipment at two ends respectively.
1. Structure
The structure of the straight through cable is shown in Figure 10-22.
1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag 4. Tag 2

Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the straight through cable is shown in Table 10-20.
Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model
connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with
SFTP network cable
10-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
Cable model Communication cable-100±15 Ω-CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8
cores-PANTONE 445U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof level CM
Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10.4.7 Crossover Cable
The crossover cable is used to connect the NM computer to the OptiX OSN
3500/2500/1500. Both ends of the cable use RJ-45 connector. One end is connected
to the ETH interface, and the other end to the network port of the compute.
1. Structure
The structure of the crossover cable is shown in Figure 10-23.
1. Network port connector RJ-45 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag 4. Network cable 5. Tag 2
Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the crossover cable is shown in Table 10-21.

Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.2 X2.6 Green Pair
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
10-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model
connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with
SFTP network cable
Model Communication cable-100±15Ω-CAT5E-SFTP-24AWG-8 cores

PANTONE 646U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof level CM
Length 5 m, 30 m
10-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
10.5 Signal Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables are listed in Table 10-22.
Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables
75 Ω E1 cable 75 Ω E1 cable 75 Ω E1 cable
120 Ω E1 cable 120 Ω E1 cable 120 Ω E1 cable
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable E3/DS3/STM-1 cable E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
Extended subrack service

_ _
connection cable
10.5.1 75 Ω 8xE1 Cable
The 75 Ω 8xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on

the D75S interface board. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to the 75 Ω E1
interface board. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be
made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals.
1. Structure
The structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Figure 10-24.
1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 2. Tag 1, marked: ”W1 (E1:1 to 4)”

3. Tag 3, marked: “W2 (E1:5 to 8)” 4. Main tag
Figure 10-24 Structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-23.
10-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable

PIN of Cable W1 PIN of Cable W2
DB44 Core Series Remark DB44 Core Series Remark
NO. NO.
38 Ring 1 R1 34 Ring 1 R5
23 Tip 19 Tip
22 Tip 18 Tip
21 Tip 17 Tip
20 Tip 16 Tip
15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 2 T5
30 Tip 26 Tip
29 Tip 25 Tip
28 Tip 24 Tip
27 Tip 7 Tip
Shell Out braid of whole cable & ring Shell Out braid of whole cable &
of each coax ring of each coax
Item Description
Connector X Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male
Cable model Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x8(A)-75 ohm-9.65 mm-1.2

(W1/W2) mm-0.252 mm-white
Fireproof level CM
Number of cores 8 x E1
Diameter cover diameter 9.65mm-insulation diameter 1.2mm-conductor

diameter 0.252mm
Length 3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
10-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Caution:
The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable.
Be sure not to discard it before installation
10.5.2 75 Ω 16xE1 Cable
The 75 Ω 16xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on

the L75S interface board. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 75 Ω
E1 interface board L75S. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs
to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.
1. Structure
1. Cable connector 2. Terminal

2. Pin Assignment

Cable W Cable W
Plug X Series Remark Plug X Series Remark
Core Core
No. No.
a1 Tip a10 Tip
1 R1 17 R9
a2 Ring a11 Ring
10-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Cable W Cable W
Core Core
No. No.
a3 Tip a12 Tip
2 T1 18 T9
a4 Ring a13 Ring
a6 Tip a15 Tip

3 R2 19 R10
a7 Ring a16 Ring
a8 Tip a17 Tip

4 T2 20 T10
a9 Ring a18 Ring
b1 Tip b10 Tip

5 R3 21 R11
b2 Ring b11 Ring
b3 Tip b12 Tip

6 T3 22 T11
b4 Ring b13 Ring
b6 Tip b15 Tip

7 R4 23 R12
b7 Ring b16 Ring
b8 Tip b17 Tip

8 T4 24 T12
b9 Ring b18 Ring
c1 Tip c10 Tip

9 R5 25 R13
c2 Ring c11 Ring
c3 Tip c12 Tip

10 T5 26 T13
c4 Ring c13 Ring
c6 Tip c15 Tip

11 R6 27 R14
c7 Ring c16 Ring
c8 Tip c17 Tip

12 T6 28 T14
a9 Ring c18 Ring
d1 Tip d10 Tip

13 R7 29 R15
d2 Ring d11 Ring
d3 Tip d12 Tip

14 T7 30 T15
d4 Ring d13 Ring
d6 Tip d15 Tip

15 R8 31 R16
d7 Ring d16 Ring
10-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Cable W Cable W
Core Core
No. No.
d8 Tip d17 Tip
16 T8 32 T16
d9 Ring d18 Ring
Item Description
Connector X 2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN-28-30AWG-press-fit
Cable model (W1/W2) Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x32(A)-75 ohm-18

mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm-Huawei gray
Fireproof level CM
Number of cores 16 x E1
Cover diameter-insulation 18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm

diameter-conductor
diameter
Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m
Caution:
The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable.
Be sure not to discard it before installation
10.5.3 120 Ω 8xE1 Cable
The 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses DB44
connector, connected to 120 Ω E1 electrical interface board D12S. The other end is
connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can
transmit eight E1 signals.
1. Structure
10-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 2. Tag 1, marked:"W1 (TX1–8)"

3. Tag 3, marked"W2 (RX1–8)" 4. Main tag
Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable
2. Pin Assignment
Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable
PIN of Cable W1 Remark PIN of Cable W2 Remark
DB44 Core Series DB44 Core Series
NO. NO.
15 Blue Pair Tx1 38 Blue Pair Rx1
30 White 23 White
14 Orange Pair Tx2 37 Orange Pair Rx2
29 White 22 White
13 Green Pair Tx3 36 Green Pair Rx3
28 White 21 White
12 Brown Pair Tx4 35 Brown Pair Rx4
27 White 20 White
11 Grey Pair Tx5 34 Grey Pair Rx5
26 White 19 White
10 Blue Pair Tx6 33 Blue Pair Rx6
25 Red 18 Red
9 Orange Pair Tx7 32 Orange Pair Rx7
24 Red 17 Red
10-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
PIN of Cable W1 Remark PIN of Cable W2 Remark

DB44 Core Series DB44 Core Series
NO. NO.
8 Green Pair Tx8 31 Green Pair Rx8
7 Red 16 Red
Shell Out braid of whole cable Shell Out braid of whole cable
Item Description
Connector X Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male
Cable model Communication cable-120 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-16

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 16
Inner conductor 0.5 mm

diameter
Fireproof level CM
Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m
10.5.4 120 Ω 16xE1 Cable
The 120 Ω 16 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses 2 mm HM

connector, connected to the 120 Ω E1 electrical interface board L12S or PL1B. The
other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required.
Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.
1. Structure

3
W2
X
W1
2
1. Cable connector 2. Terminal 3. Main tag

10-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
2. Pin Assignment
Cable W1 Cable W2
Core Core
NO. NO.
a1 Blue a3 Blue
Pair R1 Pair T1
a2 White a4 White
a6 Orange a8 Orange
Pair R2 Pair T2
a7 White a9 White
b1 Green b3 Green
Pair R3 Pair T3
b2 White b4 White
b6 Brown b8 Brown
Pair R4 Pair T4
b7 White b9 White
c1 Grey c3 Grey
Pair R5 Pair T5
c2 White c4 White
c6 Blue c8 Blue
Pair R6 Pair T6
c7 Red c9 Red
d1 Orange d3 Orange
Pair R7 Pair T7
d2 Red d4 Red
d6 Green d8 Green
Pair R8 Pair T8
d7 Red d9 Red
a10 Brown a12 Brown

Pair R9 Pair T9
a11 Red a13 Red
a15 Grey a17 Grey

Pair R10 Pair T10
a16 Red a18 Red
b10 Blue b12 Blue

Pair R11 Pair T11
b11 Black b13 Black
b15 Orange b17 Orange

Pair R12 Pair T12
b16 Black b18 Black
c10 Green c12 Green

Pair R13 Pair T13
c11 Black c13 Black
10-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Cable W1 Cable W2
Core Core
NO. NO.
c15 Brown c17 Brown
Pair R14 Pair T14
c16 Black c18 Black
d10 Grey d12 Grey

Pair R15 Pair T15
d11 Black d13 Black
d15 Blue d17 Blue

Pair R16 Pair T16
d16 Yellow d18 Yellow
a5 shield PGND a14 shield PGND
Item Description
Connector X 2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN—24-26AWG-press-fit
Cable model Symmetrical twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-32

W1/W2 cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 32
Inner conductor 0.5 mm

diameter
Fireproof level CM
Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m
10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable
The E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is used to input/output E3/DS3/STM-1 signal. One end

uses SMB connector, connected to the E3/DS3/STM-1 interface board. The other
end is connected to the DDF, and the connector needs to be made as required.
1. Structure
The structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is shown in Figure 10-28.
10-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Coaxial connector-SMB 2. Main tag 3. Coaxial cable

Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
2. Pin Assignment
None
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female
Cable I Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded
Diameter cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1

mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm
Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m
Cable II Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-4.4 mm-2.4 mm-0.4

mm-shielded-grey

Length 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
Cable III Model Coaxial cable-75ohm-6.7mm-3.8mm-0.61mm-shielded-grey

Length 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m
Cable IV Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-5.80 mm-3.71 mm-0.643 mm-black

Length 30 m
Fireproof level CM
10-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports extended subrack, adding/dropping up to 504 x E1

services. The extended subrack service connection cable is used to connect the
service between main subrack and extended subrack in one cabinet. One end of the
cable is connected to the EXA/EXB interface of the UXCSB board of the main
subrack and the other end to the EXA/EXB interface of the XCE board.
1. Structure
The structure of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Figure
10-29.
2 1
1 2
X1 X2
1. PIN#1 2. PIN#26
Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in
Table 10-27.
10-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable
Pin Core and serial number
1 Core 1
14
2 Ground
15 Core 2
16 Ground
4 Core 3
17
5 Ground
18 Core 4
19 Ground
9 Core 5
21
8 Ground
23 Core 6
10
22 Ground
12 Core 7
24
11 Ground
26 Core 8
13
25 Ground
7 Core 9
20
X1/X2 enclosure Ground
10-42
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable Connector-1.27mm mini D type-26PIN
male-LVDS,28AWG or 30AWG
Cable model Communication Cable-100Ω-UL20379-30AWG-8P+1P-grey
Number of cores 8P+1P
Fireproof level CM
Length 5m
10.6 Clock Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables are listed in Table 10-28.
Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables
75 Ω clock cable 75 Ω clock cable 75 Ω clock cable
120 Ω clock cable 120 Ω clock cable 120 Ω clock cable
1/2-channel clock transfer 1/2-channel clock 1/2-channel clock transfer

cable transfer cable cable
10.6.1 Clock Cable
The clock cable includes 75 Ω clock cable and 120 Ω clock cable, used for
inputting/outputting external clock signal.
For the 75 Ω clock cable, one end uses SMB connector, connected to the external
clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock
equipment and the connector needs to be made as required
For the 120 Ω clock cable, one end uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the external
clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock
equipment and the connector needs to be made as required. The 120 Ω clock cable
can input/output two clock signals.
1. Structure
The structure of the 75 Ω and 120 Ω clock cables is respectively shown in Figure
10-30 and Figure 10-31.
10-43
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Coaxial connector -SMB 2. Tag

Figure 10-30 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable
1. Tag 1 (R) and Tag2 (T) 2. Communication cable 3. Main tag

4. Network port connector-RJ-45
Figure 10-31 Structure of the 120 Ω clock cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable is shown in Table 10-29.
Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable
X1 W Remark
X1.1 Blue W1
X1.2 White
X1.4 Orange W2
X1.5 White
10-44
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
75 Ω Connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female
clock
cable Cable Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1mm-0.34
mm-shielded

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m
120 Ω Connector X1 Network interface

clock cable-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector
cable
Cable Model Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4
mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U
Conductor 0.4 mm/26AWG

diameter
Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, 100 m
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable
The clock transfer cable includes 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock cables.
1. Structure
The structure of 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cables is shown
in Figure 10-32 and Figure 10-33 respectively.
1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 2. Main tag

3. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB
Figure 10-32 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable
10-45
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 2. Tag 1:“1#” 3. Tag 2:“2#” 4. Main tag

5. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB 6. Tag 3:“1#” 7. Tag 4:“2#”
Figure 10-33 Structure of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable is shown in
Table 10-30.
Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable
Connector 75 Ω cable Color 120 Ω cable
X1 Core Blue W3
Shielding layer White
X2 Core Blue W4
Shielding layer White
Item Description
1-channel Connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female
75 Ω Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34

cable mm-shielded
Diameter Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1

120 Ω Model Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4

cable mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U

diameter
Length 30 m
10-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Item Description
2-channel X1/X2 connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female
75 Ω Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34

cable mm-shielded
Diameter Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1

120 Ω Model Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4

cable mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U

diameter
Length 30 m
10-47
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 A Indicator Description for
Hardware Description Manual Equipment and Board
A Indicator Description for

Equipment and Board
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description

Power indicator – Green On The cabinet is powered on.
Off The cabinet is not powered on.
Critical alarm indicator – Red On There is a critical alarm.
Off There is no critical alarm.
Major alarm indicator – Orange On There is a major alarm.
Off There is no major alarm.
Minor alarm indicator – Yellow On There is a minor alarm.
Off There is no minor alarm.
A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description

1. Board Hardware Indicator - STAT
Status Description
On, green The board works normally.
Off The board is not powered on, or no service is configured.
2. Service Activation Indicator - ACT

Status Description
On, green The service is activated, and the board is in service.
Off The board is not activated.
3. Board Software Indicator - PROG

Status Description
On, green The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded
successfully, or the board software is initialized
successfully.
On for 100ms and off for The board software or software for FPGA is being
100ms alternatively, green uploaded.
On for 300ms and off for The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS
300ms alternatively, green boot stage.
On, red The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed
in uploading or in initializing.
4. Service Alarm Indicator - SRV

Status Description
On, green Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.
On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.
Off No service is configured or no power is fed.
A-2
5. Power Monitoring Indicators and Alarm Cut Indicator of the SCC

Indicator name Status Description
Indicator for –48 V On, green The –48 V power supply A is normal.
power supply A
(PWRA) On, red, or off The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or
failed).
Indicator for –48 V On, green The –48 V power supply B is normal.
power supply B
(PWRB) On, red, or off The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or
failed).
Indicator for +3.3 V On, green The +3.3 V protection power is normal.
power supply C
(PWRC) On, red The +3.3 V protection power is lost.
Alarm cut indicator On, yellow Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status.
(ALMC)
Off Give sound warning upon alarm.
6. Ethernet Indicators of the SCC and AUX

Indicator name Status Description
LINK indicator On Link between network cable and equipment is
(Green) established.
Off Link between network cable and equipment is

not established.
ACT indicator On There is data transmitted/received.

(Orange)
Off There is no data transmitted/received.
7. Ethernet Port Indicator of Interface Board

Status Description Remark
The green and yellow The Ethernet cable is not -
indicator is off. connected.
The green indicator is on, The Ethernet cable is -

and the yellow indicator connected, but no data is
does not flash. transmitted.
The green indicator is on, The Ethernet cable is The flashing frequency of
and the yellow indicator connected, and data is yellow indicator depends on
flashes. transmitted. the transmission of Ethernet
data.
A-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual B Board Version Description
B Board Version Description
B.1 Board Version List

The board versions provided by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX
OSN 1500 are listed
Equipment
OSN3500 OSN3500 OSN2500
OSN2500 OSN1500A OSN1500B
(40Gbit/s) (80Gbit/s) REG
Board
N2SL64 √ √
N1SL16(A) √ √ √ √ √ √
N2SL16(A) √ √ √ √ √ √
N1SF16 √ √ √ √ √ √
N1SLQ4 √ √ √ √ √
N2SLQ4 √ √ √ √ √
N1SLD4 √ √ √ √ √
N2SLD4 √ √ √ √ √
N1SL4 √ √ √ √ √
N2SL4 √ √ √ √ √
N1SLT1 √ √ √ √ √
N1SLQ1 √ √ √ √ √
N2SLQ1 √ √ √ √ √
N1SL1 √ √ √ √ √
N2SL1 √ √ √ √ √
B-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Equipment
OSN3500 OSN3500 OSN2500
Board
R1SLD4 √ √ √
R1SL4 √ √ √
R1SLQ1 √ √ √
R1SL1 √ √ √
N1SEP1 √ √ √ √ √
N1SEP √ √ √ √ √
N1PQ1 √ √ √ √
R1PD1 A/B √ √ √
R1PL1 A/B √ √
R1L75S √
R1L12S √
N1PQM √ √ √ √
N1PD3 √ √ √ √
N1PL3 √ √ √ √
N1PL3A √ √ √ √ √
N1SPQ4 √ √ √ √
N2SPQ4 √ √ √ √
N1D75S √ √ √ √
N1D12S √ √ √ √
N1D12B √ √ √ √
N1D34S √ √ √ √
N1C34S √ √ √ √
N1MU04 √ √ √ √
N1EU08 √ √ √
N1OU08 √ √ √
N2OU08 √ √ √
N1TSB8 √ √ √ √
N1EFS4 √ √ √ √ √
N1EFS0 √ √ √ √
B-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Equipment
OSN3500 OSN3500 OSN2500
Board
N2EFS0 √ √ √ √
N1EGS2 √ √ √ √ √
N2EGS2 √ √ √ √ √
N1EGT2 √ √ √ √ √
N1EFT8 √ √ √ √ √
R1EFT4 √ √ √
N1EMR0 √ √ √ √ √
N2EMR0 √ √ √ √ √
N1EGR2 √ √ √ √ √
N2EGR2 √ √ √ √ √
N1EFF8 √ √ √ √
N1ETF8 √ √ √ √
N1ETS8 √ √ √ √
N1ADL4 √ √ √ √ √
N1ADQ1 √ √ √ √ √
N1IDL4 √ √ √ √ √
N1IDQ1 √ √ √ √ √
N1MST4 √ √ √ √ √
N1MR2A √ √ √ √ √
N1MR2B √ √ √
N1MR2C √ √ √ √
N1LWX √ √ √ √ √
N1BPA √ √ √ √ √
N1BA2 √ √ √ √ √
N1DCU √ √
N1GXCSA √
N2GXCSA √
N1EXCSA √
N1UXCSA √
B-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Equipment
OSN3500 OSN3500 OSN2500
Board
N1UXCSB √
N1XCE √
Q1CXL1/4/16 √ √ √
Q2CXL1/4/16 √ √ √
N1SCC √ √
N1GSCC √ √
N2GSCC √ √
Q1CRG √
N1PIU √ √
Q1PIU √ √
R1PIU √
R1PIUA √
N1FAN √ √ √ √
R1FAN √ √
N1FANA √ √
R1EOW √ √
Q1SAP √ √
Q1SEI √ √
N1AUX √ √
R1AUX √ √
R2AUX √ √
61COA/62COA √ √ √ √ √ √
TDA √ √ √ √ √ √
UPM √ √ √ √
√ indicates that the product supports the board.
B.2 Version Description

B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board
The optical line interface boards of OptiX OSN products all have two versions: N1 and
N2, as described in Table B-1
B-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards

Item Description
Similarity The boards of two versions implement the same functions.
The N2 version supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM), but the

Difference
N1 version does not.
NM support The T2000 distinguishes N1 from N2 directly.
OptiX OSN Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003)
product supports N1 and N2 optical line interface boards.
The optical interface board with single optical interface supports

replacement between N1 and N2. After completion of hardware
replacement, use the direct replacement command on the T2000 to
effectuate the replacement.
Note:
Version
replacement If an N2 board starts the TCM function before replacement, its replacement
by an N1 board will fail.
Other optical interface boards do not support replacement between N1

and N2.
Note: The optical interface boards with one optical interface refer to SL64, SL16, SF16, SL4
and SL1, which have one pair of optical interface.
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board

The Ethernet processing boards of OptiX OSN products can support N1, N2 or R1
versions. For details, refer to Table B-2. The EGT2 and EFT8 are Ethernet transparent
transmission boards, supporting only N1 version currently. The EFT4, an Ethernet
transparent transmission board seated in half-height slot and used on the OptiX OSN
1500 subrack, supports R1. Except EFS4, other Ethernet processing boards with
Layer 2 switching function all support N1 and N2 version.
Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version
Version
N1 N2 R1
Board
EGT2/EFT8 Supported – –
EFT4 – – Supported
EFS4 Supported – –
EFS0/EGS2 Supported Supported –
EMR0/EGR2 Supported Supported –
N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards are described Table B-3.
B-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards

Item Description
Similarity The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same.
The uplink bandwidth of the N1 board at the SDH side is half that of the N2
Difference board.
The N1 and N2 boards have the same hardware but different software.
NM support The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2 directly.
V100R001 products only support N1Ethernet processing boards. When

N2 boards are inserted, they are displayed as N1 boards on the T2000
and used as N1 boards.

Product
configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2
support
software.

configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2
software.
For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to
N2.
The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and

Version V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards
replacement (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2
boards on the T2000).
When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to
N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During
the upgrade, services will be interrupted.
B-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

1. GXCSA
The OptiX OSN 3500 GXCSA has N1 and N2 versions, as described in Table B-4
Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
Item Description
Similarity Board functions and board software are the same.
Difference Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware
NM support The T2000 does not differentiate N1 from N2.
Product Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003)

support supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA.
The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other.

Version Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program,
replacement select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the
upgrading will fail.
2. SCC
The OptiX OSN 3500 SCC supports the following three versions:
N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC, as described in Table B-5.
Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC
Item Description
Description Implement system control and communication functions.
N1SCC: does not support extended subracks or intelligent features

N1GSCC: support extended subracks and intelligent
Difference
N2GSCC: applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 and OptiX OSN 3500,
supporting intelligent features.
On the T2000, N1SCC is displayed as SCC, N1GSCC as GSCC,

NM support N2GSCC as GSCC. Specific version number can be distinguished by bar
code on the board front panel.
V100R001 products support N1SCC only.

Product
V100R002 products support N1SCC and N1GSCC.
support
V100R003 products support all versions.
Version
Compatible with subsequent versions.
replacement
3. CXL1/4/16
The CXL1/4/16 has Q1 and Q2 versions, as described in Table B-6.
B-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards

Item Description
Implement cross-connect, clock, system control and optical line
Similarity
processing functions.
Q1CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 5 Gbit/s lower order

cross-connect capacity.
Difference
Q2CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 20 Gbit/slower order
cross-connect capacity, and support intelligent features.
CXL1/4/16 is displayed as three parts on the T2000: system control,

cross-connect and optical line interface.
NM support
Q1CXL1/4/16 is displayed as SCC, CXL and Q1SL1/4/16.
Q2CXL1/4/16 is displayed as GSCC, ECXL and Q1SL1/4/16.
V100R001 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 only.

Product
V100R002 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16.
support
V100R003 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16.
Version
Compatible with subsequent versions.
replacement
B.2.4 Other Boards

The OptiX OSN PIU, AUX and FAN also have several versions, as described in Table
B-7.
Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN
Description
Item
PIU AUX FAN
Provide auxiliary interfaces
Access and distribute –48 V
Similarity and orderwire processing Dissipate heat
power
functions
N1FAN: applicable to the

OptiX OSN 3500 and the
N1PIU: applicable to 3500 N1AUX: applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 3500
Q1PIU: applicable to 2500 R1FAN: applicable to
Difference R1AUX and R2AUX:
R1PIU: applicable to 1500B OptiX OSN 1500
applicable to the OptiX OSN
R1PIUA: applicable to 1500A 1500 N1FANA: used in high
power consumption
occasions
All displayed as PIU on the All displayed as AUX on the All displayed as FAN or
NM support
T2000. T2000. FANA on the T2000.
For V100R003 products,

Version
Irreplaceable R1AUX and R2AUX can be Irreplaceable
replacement
replaced by each other.
B-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual C Power Consumption and Weight
C Power Consumption and Weight
Board Power Weight (kg) Board Power Weight (kg)

consumption (W) consumption (W)
N2SL64 32 1.12 N1EFS4 30 0.98
N1/N2SL16 20 1.10 N1/N2EFS0 35 0.98
N1SF16 26 1.09 N1/N2EGS2 40/43.2 1.04
N1/N2SLQ4 16 1.04 N1EGT2 23 0.90
N1/N2SLD4 15 1.01 N1EFT8 26 1.01
N1/N2SL4 15 1.00 N1EFT4 14 0.53
N1SLT1 15 1.22 N1/N2EMR0 50 1.20
N1/N2SLQ1 15 1.04 N1/N2EGR2 54 1.10
N1/N2SL1 14 1.00 N1ETF8 2 0.37
R1SL4 10 0.34 N1EFF8 6 0.44
R1SLD4 11 0.36 N1ETS8 2.5 0.37
R1SLQ1 12 0.40 N1ADL4 35 0.90
R1SL1 10 0.34 N1ADQ1 37 0.95
N1BA2 20 1.01 N1IDL4 36.6 1.01
N1BPA 20 1.01 N1IDQ1 36.6 1.01
N1DCU 0 0.42 N1MR2A 0 1.01
N1SEP1 17 0.95 N1MR2B 0 1.01
N1EU08 11 0.41 N1MR2C 0 1.01
C-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual C Power Consumption and Weight
Board Power Weight (kg) Board Power Weight (kg)

consumption (W) consumption (W)
N2SL64 32 1.12 N1EFS4 30 0.98
N1/N2OU08 6 0.41 N1LWX 30 1.10
N1EU04 6 0.40 N1GXCSA 27 1.81
N1/N2SPQ4 24 0.91 N1EXCSA 62 2.00
N1MU04 2 0.41 N1UXCS 65 2.00
N1PD3 19 1.12 N1XCE 25 1.50
N1PL3 15 1.00 Q1CXL1/4/16 40 1.12
N1D34S 2 0.38 Q2CXL1/4/16 40 1.12
N1C34S 2 0.31 N1SCC 10 0.88
N1PQM 22 1.01 N2GSCC 10 0.88
N1PQ1 19 1.01 Q1CRG 12 0.90
N1D75S 5.5 0.35 N1PIU 8 1.15
N1D12B 1 0.31 Q1PIU 8 1.25
N1D12S 9 0.35 R1PIU 1.5 1.25
R1PD1 15 0.5 R1PIUA 3 1.25
R1PL1 7 0.45 N1FAN (Note 15 1.50

1)
R1L75S 5 0.27 R1FAN (Note 20 1.01

1)
R1L12S 3 0.24 R1EOW 10 0.40
N1PL3A 15 1.00 N1AUX 19 0.96
N1TSB8 5 0.28 N2AUX 19 0.96
61COA 10 3.50 62COA 75 8.00
Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.
C-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual D Abbreviations and Acronyms
D Abbreviations and Acronyms
Abbreviation Full name

A
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
APS ATM Protection Switch
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CC Continuity Check
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
COA Case-shaped Optical Amplifier
CPU Center Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
D-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

DTR Data Terminal Ready
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
FC Fiber Channel
FE Fast Ethernet
FICON Fiber Connection
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High level Data Link Control
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication

Standardization Sector
D-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

L
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB LoopBack
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
MPLS Multi-protocol Label Switch
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
NA Not applicable
NRZ Non Return to Zero
OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
PA nylon(polyamide); polyamide bar; Power Amplifier; Project

Accounting; Project Administrator; Protocol Adapter
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
RD Receive Data
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
SG Signaling Ground
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SSM Synchronization Status Marker
TD Transmit Data
TDA Tone & Data Access Unit
TPS Tributary Protection Switching
D-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

U
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VPN Virtual Private Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
D-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
Hardware Description Manual Index
Index
ADL4, 7-34
Numerics ADQ1, 7-34
ATM service processing board with IMA function
1:1 TPS protection,for EFS0, 7-17 IDL4, 7-40
1:N TPS protection,for E1/T1, 6-26 IDQ1, 7-40
1:N TPS protection,for E3/DS3, 6-15 AUX
1:N TPS protection,for E4/STM-1, 6-5 communication module, 9-33
1:N TPS protection,for STM-1, 5-40 interface, 9-36
120 Ω E1 cable, 10-35, 10-37 interface module, 9-33
1-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 power module, 9-33
2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 technical parameter, 9-47
75 Ω E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33 AUX board
DIP switch and jumper, 9-46
front panel, 9-36
A function, 9-30
abbreviation, D-1 principle, 9-33
acronym, D-1 slots, 9-30
ACT. see service activation indicator version description, 9-46
ADL4 board
front panel, 7-36 B
function, 7-34
indicator, 7-37, 7-42 BA2 board
interface, 7-37 application, 9-12
principle, 7-35 front panel, 9-14
protection configuration, 7-38 function, 9-12
slots, 7-34 indicator, 9-14
technical parameter, 7-39 interface, 9-14
version description, 7-39, 7-44 principle, 9-13
ADQ1 board slots, 9-12
front panel, 7-36 technical parameter, 9-15
function, 7-34 version description, 9-15
indicator, 7-37, 7-42 BGND power cable, 10-5
interface, 7-37 board
principle, 7-35 appearance, 4-11
protection configuration, 7-38 classification, 4-1
slots, 7-34 indicator (summary table), A-2
technical parameter, 7-39 power consumption (summary table), C-1
version description, 7-39, 7-44 weight (summary table), C-1
alarm concatenanting cable between OSN subrack and board classification
other subrack, 10-17 cross-connect and SCC boards, 4-7
alarm concatenation, 9-44 Data processong boards, 4-5
alarm cut indicator, A-3 other boards, 4-9
architecture,equipment, 1-1 PDH boards, 4-3
ATM service processing board SDH boards, 4-1
i-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
board hardware indicator, A-2 COA

board software indicator, A-2 62COA, 9-16
BPA board application, 9-17
application, 9-12 front panel, 9-19
front panel, 9-14 function, 9-17
function, 9-12 indicator, 9-19
indicator, 9-14 installation, 9-22
interface, 9-14 interface, 9-20
principle, 9-13 MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface, 9-21
slots, 9-12 power interface, 9-22
technical parameter, 9-15 principle, 9-18
version description, 9-15 RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port, 9-20
technical specification, 9-23
version description, 9-23
C COA concatenating cable, 10-26
C2. see signal label byte connector
C34S board E2000/APC, 9-20
front panel, 6-13 CRG board
cabinet front panel, 8-24
configuration, 2-3 function, 8-22
ETSI cabinet, 2-1 indicator, 8-25
indicator, 2-3 interface, 8-26
indicator (summary table), A-1 principle, 8-23
power distribution unit, 2-4 slots, 8-22
size, 2-6 switch, 8-24
technical parameter, 2-6 techincal parameter, 8-26
type, 2-1 version description, 8-26
weight, 2-6 cross-connect & synchronous timing board
cabinet door grounding cable, 10-7 CXL1, 8-9
cabinet indicator cable, 10-14 CXL16, 8-9
cable technical parameter CXL4, 8-9
1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 EXCS, 8-2
–48 V cabinet power cable, 10-6 GXCS, 8-2
75 Ω E1 cable, 10-32, 10-35 UXCS, 8-2
alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and XCE, 8-2
other subrack, 10-18 crossover cable, 10-29
cabinet BGND power cable, 10-6 CXL1 board
cabinet door grounding cable, 10-8 front panel, 8-11
cabinet indicator cable, 10-15 function, 8-9
cabinet PGND power cable, 10-6 indicator, 8-11
clock cable, 10-45 interface, 8-13
COA concatenating cable, 10-27 parameter configuration, 8-13
crossover cable, 10-30 principle, 8-10
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-40 technical parameter, 8-14
extended subrack service connection cable, 10-43 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 board
housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-20 protection configuration, 8-13
HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 slots, 8-9
indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN version description, 8-14
subracks, 10-16 CXL16 board
OAM serial port cable, 10-22 front panel, 8-11
RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-25 function, 8-9
serial 1–4/f&f cable, 10-23 indicator, 8-11
straight through cable, 10-28 interface, 8-13
subrack power cable, 10-9, 10-10 parameter configuration, 8-13
telephone wire, 10-26 principle, 8-10
UPM power cable, 10-13 technical parameter, 8-14
capacity CXL4 board
cross-connect for OptiX OSN 2500/1500, 8-9 front panel, 8-11
cross-connect for OptiX OSN 3500, 8-2 function, 8-9
case-shape optical amplifier indicator, 8-11
COA, 9-16 interface, 8-13
clock cable, 10-43 parameter configuration, 8-13
i-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
principle, 8-10 1:1 TPS protection, 7-17

technical parameter, 8-14 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 7-19
1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 7-18
1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 7-17
D front panel, 7-15
D12B. see also PQ1 indicator, 7-16
D12S. see also PQ1 interface, 7-16
D34S. see also PD3 parameter configuration, 7-19
D34S board slots, 7-11
slots, 6-11 EFS0/EFS4/EGS2 board
version description, 6-20 version description, 7-20
D75S. see also PQ1 EFS4 board
D75S/D12S/D12B board front panel, 7-15
slots, 6-22 interface, 7-16
version description, 6-29 parameter configuration, 7-19
DCU principle, 7-14
application, 9-25 slots, 7-11
function, 9-25 EFS8 board
interface, 9-27 function, 7-12
principle, 9-26 principle, 7-14
technical parameter, 9-28 EFT4 board
version description, 9-28 front panel, 7-5
DCU board function, 7-3
dispersion compensation board interface, 7-7
DCU, 9-25 parameter configuration, 7-8
principle, 7-4
slots, 7-2
E EFT8 board
E1 interface board front panel, 7-5
D75S, 6-22 function, 7-3
E1 processing board indicator, 7-6
PQ1, 6-22 interface, 7-7
E1 processing board (half-slot) parameter configuration, 7-8
PD1 board, 6-31 principle, 7-4
PL1 board, 6-31 slots, 7-2
E1/T1 interface board EGR2 board
D12B, 6-22 front panel, 7-28
D12S, 6-22 function, 7-24
E1/T1 processing board indicator, 7-29
PQM, 6-22 interface board, 7-30
E2000/APC optical interface, 10-4 principle, 7-27
E3/DS3 interface switching board protection configuration, 7-30
D34S, 6-11 slots, 7-24
E3/DS3 processing board technical parameter, 7-33
PD3, 6-11 version description, 7-32
PL3, 6-11 EGS2 board
PL3A, 6-11 front panel, 7-15
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-39 function, 7-12
E4/STM-1 processing board indicator, 7-16
SPQ4, 6-1 interface, 7-16
EFF8 board parameter configuration, 7-19
front panel, 7-5 principle, 7-14
interface, 7-7 slots, 7-11
EFF8/ETF8 board technical parameter, 7-21
slots, 7-2 EGT2 board
version description, 7-8 front panel, 7-5
EFS0 board function, 7-3
i-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
indicator, 7-6 ETSI cabinet

interface, 7-7 appearance, 2-1
parameter configuration, 7-8 EU08. see also SEP1
principle, 7-4 EU08 board
slots, 7-2 front panel, 5-35
EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 board interface, 5-36
version description, 7-8 slots, 5-32
ejector lever, 4-11 technical parameter, 5-40
EMR0 board EU08/OU08 board
indicator, 7-29 EXCS board
interface board, 7-30 front panel, 8-4
principle, 7-27 EXCS board
protection configuration, 7-30 function, 8-2
version description, 7-32 parameter configuration, 8-7
EOW board principle, 8-3
function, 9-30 EXCSA board
principle, 9-33 version description, 8-7
slots, 9-30 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41
version description, 9-46
Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding
Cable, 10-9
F
equipment architecture, 1-1 FAN
OptiX OSN 1500A, 1-5 function, 9-60
OptiX OSN 1500B, 1-5 principle, 9-60
OptiX OSN 2500, 1-3 technical parameter, 9-62
OptiX OSN 3500, 1-1 version description, 9-62
ETF8 board FAN board
front panel, 7-5 indicator, 9-61
interface, 7-7 fan control board
Ethernet board with RPR function FAN, 9-59
EGR2, 7-24 fan tray assembly. see FAN
EMR0, 7-24 FC/PC optical interface, 10-4
Ethernet electrical interface board FE processing board
ETF8, 7-2 RPR transmission, 7-24
Ethernet indicator switching, 7-11
ACT indicator, A-3 transparent transmission, 7-2
LINK indicator, A-3 fiber jumper. see tail fiber
Ethernet interface switching board
ETS8, 7-11
Ethernet optical interface board G
EFF8, 7-2 GE processing board
Ethernet port indicator, A-3 RPR transmission, 7-24
Ethernet switching processing board switching, 7-11
EFS0, 7-11 transparent transmission, 7-2
EFS4, 7-11 GSCC board
EGS2, 7-11 front panel, 8-18
Ethernet transparent transmission board slots, 8-16
EFT4, 7-2 GXCS board
EFT8, 7-2 front panel, 8-4
EGT2, 7-2 function, 8-2
ETS8 board indicator, 8-4
front panel, 7-15 interface, 8-5
indicator, 7-16 parameter configuration, 8-7
interface, 7-16 principle, 8-3
slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 8-7
technical parameter, 7-21 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE board
version description, 7-21 protection configuration, 8-6
i-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
slots, 8-2 front panel, 9-3

GXCSA board function, 9-1
version description, 8-7 indicator, 9-4
GXCSB board interface, 9-4
version description, 8-7 principle, 9-2
slots, 9-1
technical parameter, 9-5
H version description, 9-5
housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-18
HUB/COA power cable, 10-11 M
mapping relation between terminals and PIUs, 2-4
I MR2 board
IDL4 board slots, 9-7
front panel, 7-41 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
function, 7-40 technical parameter, 9-11
interface, 7-42 version description, 9-11
principle, 7-41 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board
protection configuration, 7-43 front panel, 9-9
slots, 7-40 function, 9-7
technical parameter, 7-44 indicator, 9-10
IDQ1 board interface, 9-10
function, 7-40 MST4 board
interface, 7-42 front panel, 7-48
principle, 7-41 function, 7-45
protection configuration, 7-43 indicator, 7-48
technical parameter, 7-44 parameter configuration, 7-49
indicator principle, 7-46
alarm cut indicator, A-3 slots, 7-45
board hardware indicator, A-2 technical parameter, 7-49
board software indicator, A-2 version description, 7-49
cabinet, 2-3 MU04. see also SPQ4
cabinet (summary table), A-1 MU04 board
Ethernet indicator, A-3 front panel, 6-4
Ethernet port indicator, A-3 function, 6-2
power monitoring indicator, A-3 interface, 6-4
service activation indicator, A-2 principle, 6-2
service alarm indicator, A-2 slots, 6-1
indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN technical parameter, 6-9
subracks, 10-15 version description, 6-9
interface switching & bridging board Multi-service transparent transmission processing board
TSB8, 5-32 MST4, 7-45
J N
J1. see path trace byte N1PIU board
front panel, 9-50
principle, 9-48
L
L12S board O
front panel, 6-32
L75S board OAM serial port cable, 10-21
front panel, 6-32 optical add/drop multiplexing board
L75S/L12S board MR2A/MR2B/MR2C, 9-7
function, 6-31 optical booster & pre-amplifier
slots, 6-31 BPA, 9-12
version description, 6-35 optical booster amplifier
LC/PC optical interface, 10-3 BA2, 9-12
LWX board orderwire processing board
i-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
EOW, 9-30 UPM power cable, 10-13

OU08. see also SEP1 PIU board
OU08 board function, 9-48
front panel, 5-35 slots, 9-48
interface, 5-36 technical parameter, 9-54
slots, 5-32 PL1 board
technical parameter, 5-40 front panel, 6-32
function, 6-31
indicator, 6-33
P interface, 6-33
path trace byte, 5-5 parameter configuration, 6-35
PD1 board principle, 6-32
1:N TPS protection, 6-33 slots, 6-31
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500A, 6-35 technical parameter, 6-35
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-35 PL3 board
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-34 front panel, 6-13
interface, 6-33 parameter configuration, 6-20
parameter configuration, 6-35 principle, 6-12
principle, 6-32 slots, 6-11
protection configuration, 6-33 technical parameter, 6-20
slots, 6-31 PL3/PD3 board
technical parameter, 6-35 1:N TPS protection, 6-15
PD1/PL1 board version description, 6-20
version description, 6-35 PL3A board
PD3 board front panel, 6-13
technical parameter, 6-20 version description, 6-20
PD3/PL3 board power consumption
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-19 board (summary table), C-1
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-18 power distribution unit
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-17 appearance, 2-4
PGND power cable, 10-5 power interface
pin assignment COA, 9-22
1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 power interface board
120 Ω E1 cable, 10-36, 10-38 PIU, 9-48
75 Ω E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33 power monitoring indicator, A-3
alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and PQ1 board
other subrack, 10-17 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-29
cabinet indicator cable, 10-14 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-28
clock cable, 10-44 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-27
COA concatenating cable, 10-27 front panel, 6-24
crossover cable, 10-29 function, 6-22
extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41 indicator, 6-25
housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-19 interface board, 6-25
HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 parameter configuration, 6-29
indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN principle, 6-23
subracks, 10-16 protection configuration, 6-26
OAM serial port cable, 10-22 slots, 6-22
RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-24 technical parameter, 6-29
serial 1–4/F&f cable, 10-23 PQ1/PQM board
straight through cable, 10-28 1:N TPS protection, 6-26
subrack power cable, 10-8, 10-10 version description, 6-29
telephone wire, 10-26 PQM board
i-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

function, 6-22 slots, 5-27
indicator, 6-25 technical parameter, 5-31
interface board, 6-25 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-24
parameter configuration, 6-29
principle, 6-23
protection configuration, 6-26
S
slots, 6-22 SAP board
technical parameter, 6-29 front panel, 9-43
PROG. see board software indicator function, 9-30
PWRA/B/C. see power monitoring indicator principle, 9-34
slots, 9-30
Q version description, 9-46
SC/PC optical interface, 10-3
Q1PIU board SCC
front panel, 9-51 power monitoring module, 8-18
SCC board
communication module, 8-17
R control module, 8-17
R1PIU board front panel, 8-18
principle, 9-49 indicator, 8-20
R1PIUA board interface, 8-21
R1SL1 board slots, 8-16
front panel, 5-29 switch, 8-19
function, 5-28 technical parameter, 8-21
indicator, 5-30 version description, 8-21
interface, 5-30 SEI board
parameter configuration, 5-30 front panel, 9-43
slots, 5-27 principle, 9-35
technical parameter, 5-31 slots, 9-30
R1SL1/R1SLQ1 board version description, 9-46
version description, 5-31 SEP1 board
R1SL4 board 1:N TPS protection, 5-36
front panel, 5-29 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 5-39
function, 5-28 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 5-38
indicator, 5-30 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 5-38
parameter configuration, 5-30 function, 5-33
technical parameter, 5-31 parameter configuration, 5-40
R1SL4/R1SLD4 board principle, 5-34
version description, 5-31 slots, 5-32
R1SLD1 board technical parameter, 5-40
R1SLD4 board serial 1–4/F&f cable, 10-22
front panel, 5-29 service activation indicator, A-2
indicator, 5-30 service alarm indicator, A-2
interface, 5-30 SF16 board
parameter configuration, 5-30 front panel, 5-10
R1SLQ1 board parameter configuration, 5-11
function, 5-28 slots, 5-7
indicator, 5-30 technical parameter, 5-12
interface, 5-30 version description, 5-11
parameter configuration, 5-30 signal label byte, 5-5
i-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
size OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25

cabinet, 2-6 OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11
OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23 OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3
OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-26
OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-17 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-13
OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-9 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3
SL1 board SLQ1 board
front panel, 5-24 front panel, 5-24
function, 5-22 function, 5-22
indicator, 5-24 indicator, 5-24
interface, 5-25 interface, 5-25
parameter configuration, 5-25 parameter configuration, 5-25
principle, 5-22 principle, 5-22
slots, 5-21 slots, 5-21
technical parameter, 5-26 technical parameter, 5-26
version description, 5-25 version description, 5-25
SL16 board SLQ4 board
front panel, 5-10 front panel, 5-17
function, 5-7 function, 5-15
version description, 5-11 SLT1 board
SL4 board front panel, 5-24
version description, 5-19 SPQ4 board
SL64 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-5
front panel, 5-4 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-8
function, 5-1 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-7
indicator, 5-4 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-6
parameter configuration, 5-5 function, 6-2
technical parameters, 5-5 parameter configuration, 6-9
version description, 5-5 principle, 6-2
SLD4 board slots, 6-1
interface, 5-18 SRV. see service alarm indicator
parameter configuration, 5-18 STAT. see board hardware indicator
principle, 5-16 STM-1 electrical processing board
slots, 5-15 SEP1, 5-32
technical parameter, 5-19 STM-1 interface board
version description, 5-19 EU08, 5-32
slot distribution MU04, 6-1
for OptiX OSN 1500A board, 3-20 OU08, 5-32
for OptiX OSN 1500B board, 3-27 STM-1 optical processing board
for OptiX OSN 2500 board, 3-13 SL1 board, 5-21
for OptiX OSN 2500 REG board, 3-18 SLQ1 board, 5-21
for OptiX OSN 3500 board, 3-4 SLT1 board, 5-21
OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19 STM-1 optical processing board (half-slot)
i-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500
R1SL1 board, 5-27 COA, 9-23

R1SLQ1 board, 5-27 telephone wire, 10-25
STM-1/E4 processing board TPS protection
SPQ4, 6-1 1:1, 7-17
STM-16 optical processing board 1:N, 6-5, 6-15
SL16 board, 5-7 TSB8. see also SEP1
STM-4 optical processing board TSB8 board
SL4 board, 5-15 front panel, 5-35
SLD4 board, 5-15 function, 5-33
SLQ4 board, 5-15 slots, 5-32
STM-4 optical processing board (half-slot) technical parameter, 5-40
R1SL4 board, 5-27 version description, 5-40
R1SLD4 board, 5-27
STM-64 processing board
SL64 board, 5-1
U
straight through cable, 10-27 uninterruptible power modules
subrack UPM, 9-55
size for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 UPM, 2-4
size for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 front panel, 9-57
size for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 function, 9-56
size for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 indicator, 9-57
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19 interface, 9-57
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25 precaution, 9-58
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11 priciple, 9-56
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500 REG, 3-18 technical parameter, 9-58
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 UPM power cable, 10-12
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 UXCS board
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 front panel, 8-4
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 function, 8-2
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 indicator, 8-4
weight for OptiX OSN 1500, 3-31 interface, 8-5
weight for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 parameter configuration, 8-7
weight for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 principle, 8-3
weight for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 technical parameter, 8-7
subrack power cable, 10-8 UXCSA board
subrack structure version description, 8-7
OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19
OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-24
OptiX OSN 2500, 3-10 W
OptiX OSN 3500, 3-2 wavelength conversion board
system auxiliary interface board LWX, 9-1
AUX, 9-30 weight
SAP, 9-30 board (summary table), C-1
SEI, 9-30 cabinet, 2-6
system control & communication board OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23
GSCC, 8-16 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31
SCC, 8-16 OptiX OSN 2500subrack, 3-17
system control and clock unit for REG OptiX OSN 3500subrack, 3-9
CRG, 8-22
X
T
XCE board
tail fiber, 10-1 front panel, 8-4
technical parameter function, 8-2
120 Ω E1 cable, 10-37, 10-39 indicator, 8-4
cabinet, 2-6 interface, 8-5
OptiX OSN 1500 A, 3-23 parameter configuration, 8-7
OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 technical parameter, 8-7
OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-17 version description, 8-7
OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-9
technical specification
i-9

OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 Equipment Architecture ...............................................................................

D Abbreviations and Acronyms ..................................................................... D-1

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Manual Version T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31

Product Version V100R003

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

All Rights Reserved

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042586-20040501-C-1.11 The manual style is modified.

T2-042552-20041026-C-1.20 Descriptions of the EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1,

T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21 Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64, and COA are added.

T2-042590-20050820-C-1.30 1. The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN

Updates in Manual Version 1.30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 Equipment Architecture 1-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-19

4 Board Classification and List 4-1

5 SDH Boards 5-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5.3.3 Front Panel 5-17

6 PDH Boards 6-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6.2.1 Functionality 6-11

7 Data Processing Boards 7-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7.2.5 Parameter Configuration 7-19

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards 8-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8.1.2 Principle 8-3

9 Other Boards 9-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9.2.4 Version Description 9-11

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU 9-48

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable 10-21

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board A-1

B Board Version Description B-1

C Power Consumption and Weight C-1

D Abbreviations and Acronyms D-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500 1-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figure 4-1 Board appearance 4-11

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA) 9-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface 10-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Table 4-1 SDH boards 4-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 7-11

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC 8-21

Board area: housing all boards of the OptiX OSN 3500